[go: up one dir, main page]

US20230348405A1 - Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof - Google Patents

Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20230348405A1
US20230348405A1 US18/052,804 US202218052804A US2023348405A1 US 20230348405 A1 US20230348405 A1 US 20230348405A1 US 202218052804 A US202218052804 A US 202218052804A US 2023348405 A1 US2023348405 A1 US 2023348405A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
compound
psma
group
alkyl
imaging
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US18/052,804
Inventor
Martin G. Pomper
Ronnie C. Mease
Ying Chen
Sangeeta Ray
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Johns Hopkins University
Original Assignee
Johns Hopkins University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US15/618,788 external-priority patent/US20180009767A9/en
Application filed by Johns Hopkins University filed Critical Johns Hopkins University
Priority to US18/052,804 priority Critical patent/US20230348405A1/en
Assigned to THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSTY reassignment THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSTY ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CHEN, YING, MEASE, RONNIE C, POMPER, MARTIN G, RAY, SANGEETA
Publication of US20230348405A1 publication Critical patent/US20230348405A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D257/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D257/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K49/00—Preparations for testing in vivo
    • A61K49/001—Preparation for luminescence or biological staining
    • A61K49/0013—Luminescence
    • A61K49/0017—Fluorescence in vivo
    • A61K49/0019—Fluorescence in vivo characterised by the fluorescent group, e.g. oligomeric, polymeric or dendritic molecules
    • A61K49/0021—Fluorescence in vivo characterised by the fluorescent group, e.g. oligomeric, polymeric or dendritic molecules the fluorescent group being a small organic molecule
    • A61K49/0032—Methine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K49/00—Preparations for testing in vivo
    • A61K49/001—Preparation for luminescence or biological staining
    • A61K49/0013—Luminescence
    • A61K49/0017—Fluorescence in vivo
    • A61K49/005—Fluorescence in vivo characterised by the carrier molecule carrying the fluorescent agent
    • A61K49/0052—Small organic molecules
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/041—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K51/0412—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K51/0421—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/041—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K51/044—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine, rifamycins
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/041—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K51/044—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine, rifamycins
    • A61K51/0446—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine, rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/041—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K51/044—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine, rifamycins
    • A61K51/0453—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine, rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/041—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K51/0472—Heterocyclic compounds containing heavy metals, e.g. hemin, hematin, melarsoprol
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/12—Radicals substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/14—Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms, not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/18—Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D209/24—Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals with an alkyl or cycloalkyl radical attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D249/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D249/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D249/04—1,2,3-Triazoles; Hydrogenated 1,2,3-triazoles
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D255/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D249/00 - C07D253/00
    • C07D255/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having three nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D249/00 - C07D253/00 not condensed with other rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/04—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring
    • C07D311/06—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached in position 2
    • C07D311/08—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached in position 2 not hydrogenated in the hetero ring
    • C07D311/14—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached in position 2 not hydrogenated in the hetero ring substituted in position 6 and unsubstituted in position 7
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/04—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring
    • C07D311/06—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached in position 2
    • C07D311/20—Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring with oxygen or sulfur atoms directly attached in position 2 hydrogenated in the hetero ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/78—Ring systems having three or more relevant rings
    • C07D311/80—Dibenzopyrans; Hydrogenated dibenzopyrans
    • C07D311/82—Xanthenes
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F13/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 7 or 17 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F13/005—Compounds without a metal-carbon linkage
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
    • C07F5/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 3 or 13 of the Periodic Table
    • C07F5/02—Boron compounds
    • C07F5/027—Organoboranes and organoborohydrides
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5091—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing the pathological state of an organism
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/34—Genitourinary disorders
    • G01N2800/342—Prostate diseases, e.g. BPH, prostatitis

Definitions

  • Prostate cancer is the most commonly diagnosed malignancy and the second leading cause of cancer-related death in men in the United States.
  • Prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) is a marker for androgen-independent disease that also is expressed on solid (nonprostate) tumor neovasculature. Complete detection and eradication of primary tumor and metastatic foci are required to effect a cure in patients with cancer.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a compound having the structure:
  • the compound of formula (I) has the structure:
  • Z is CO 2 Q; each Q is hydrogen; R is H; a is 4; m is 6; n is 3; p is 2; R 1 is C 2 -C 12 aryl, wherein the aryl may be substituted or unsubstituted and R 1 may be the same or different; R 2 is CO 2 H; R 3 is H; W is —NRC(O)—, wherein R is H; V is —C(O)—; and Ch includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound.
  • R 1 is phenyl or a substituted phenyl.
  • R 1 is a phenyl substituted at 1, 2, 3, or 4 positions with a substituent group selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, hydroxyl, nitro, azido, amino, alkanoyl, carboxamido, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, aminoalkyl, carbocyclic aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkoxy, and a saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic heterocyclic group, which may be further substituted.
  • R 1 is a phenyl substituted with a halogen and a hydroxyl.
  • the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, aryl, combination of alkyl and aryl, or alkyl and aryl groups having heteroatoms. In certain aspects, the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, wherein the alkyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • Ch comprises a structure selected from the group consisting of:
  • Ch comprises 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA).
  • DOTA 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid
  • the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Ch includes a chelated metal and the chelated metal comprises a radioactive isotope.
  • the radioactive isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-86, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-64, Cu-67, Co-55, Co-57, Sc-47, Ac-225, Bi-213, Bi-212, Pb-212, Sm-153, Ho-166, or Dy-166.
  • the radioactive isotope is Ga-68 or Lu-177.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for imaging one or more prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) tumors, or cells the method comprising contacting the one or more tumors, or cells, with an effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and making an image.
  • PSMA prostate-specific membrane antigen
  • the imaging comprises positron emission tomography (PET).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells is selected from the group consisting of a prostate tumor or cell, a metastasized prostate tumor or cell, a lung tumor or cell, a renal tumor or cell, a glioblastoma, a pancreatic tumor or cell, a bladder tumor or cell, a sarcoma, a melanoma, a breast tumor or cell, a colon tumor or cell, a germ cell, a pheochromocytoma, an esophageal tumor or cell, a stomach tumor or cell, and combinations thereof.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for treating a tumor comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound includes a therapeutically effective radioisotope.
  • kits comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • FIG. 1 shows whole body and ex vivo organ imaging of mouse with PSMA + PC3 PIP tumor and PSMA ⁇ PC3 flu tumor at 24 h postinjection of 1 nmol of DyLight800-3;
  • FIG. 2 shows the absorbance and emission spectra, and quantum yield of exemplary compound YC-27
  • FIG. 3 shows the fluorescence decay of exemplary compound YC-27
  • FIG. 4 shows an IC 50 curve of compound YC-27 using a fluorescence-based NAALADase assay
  • FIG. 5 A - FIG. 5 O show in vivo imaging of a NOD/SCID mouse (mouse #1), bearing PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumors.
  • Mouse #1 received 10 nmol of YC-27 and dorsal (animal prone) and ventral (animal supine) views were obtained.
  • Dorsal and ventral views at 40 min p.i. FIG. 5 A , FIG. 5 B , respectively); 18.5 h ( FIG. 5 C , FIG. 5 D ); 23 h ( FIG. 5 E , FIG. 5 F ); 42.5 h ( FIG. 5 G , FIG. 5 H ); 68 h ( FIG. 5 I , FIG. 5 J ).
  • FIG. 6 A - FIG. 6 T show in vivo imaging of a NOD/SCID mouse (mouse #2) (left panel), bearing PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumors.
  • Mouse #2 received 1 nmol of YC-27 and dorsal (animal prone) and ventral (animal supine) views were obtained.
  • Dorsal and ventral views of the pre-injection image FIG. 6 A , FIG. 6 B , respectively); 10 min p.i. ( FIG. 6 C , FIG. 6 D ); 20.5 h ( FIG. 6 E , FIG. 6 F ); 24 h ( FIG. 6 G , FIG. 6 H ). Images after midline laparotomy ( FIG.
  • FIG. 7 shows PC3-PIP and PC3-flu cells treated with fluorescent compound YC-VIII-36 (green, top left) and DAPI (blue), and PC3-PIP and PC3-flu cells treated with both YC-VIII-36 and PSMA inhibitor, PMPA;
  • FIG. 8 shows PC3-PIP cells treated with DAPI (blue) and varying concentrations of YC-VIII-36 (green);
  • FIG. 9 shows time dependent internalization of YC-VIII-36 into PC3-PIP cells treated with YC-VIII-36 (green) and DAPI (blue);
  • FIG. 10 shows titration and detection of varying amounts of YC-VIII-36 injected subcutaneously into a nude mouse. (IVIS spectrum with 10 second exposure followed by spectral unmixing);
  • FIG. 11 shows fluorescence images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36;
  • FIG. 12 shows fluorescence images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36 180 minutes after injection (top) and biodistribution of exemplary compound YC-VIII-36 180 minutes after injection (bottom);
  • FIG. 13 shows FACS analysis showing the percent subpopulation of PSMA positive cells in PC3-flu, PC3-PIP, and LNCaP cells;
  • FIG. 14 shows cell sorting results for PC3-PIP cells treated with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36, including initial percentage (top center), and after 3 passages of sorting (bottom);
  • FIG. 15 A - FIG. 15 C show the number of spiked PIP-pos cells into 10 million of PC3-flu detectable by 100 nM compound YC-VIII-36 in flow cytometry (BD LSR-II).
  • Gate P1 is total number of single cells counted;
  • gate P2 at higher intensity is the number of Pip-pos cells detected and gate P3 at lower intensity;
  • FIG. 16 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ LNCaP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 99m Tc]SRV32;
  • FIG. 17 GE eXplore VISTA pseudodynamic PET image (co-registered with the corresponding CT image) of a PSMA+ LNCaP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with 0.2 mCi (7.4 MBq) of exemplary compound [ 68 Ga]SRV27;
  • FIG. 18 GE eXplore VISTA PET image (co-registered with the corresponding CT image) of a PSMA+ PIP and PSMA ⁇ flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with 0.2 mCi (7.4 MBq) of exemplary compound [Ga]SRV100;
  • FIG. 19 shows a synthetic scheme for exemplary compound SRV100 and [ 111 In]SRV100
  • FIG. 20 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC-3 PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 111 In]SRV27;
  • FIG. 21 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC-3 PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 111 In]SRV100;
  • FIG. 22 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC-3 PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary dual modality compound [ 111 In]SRV73;
  • FIG. 23 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ LNCaP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 99m Tc]SRV134B:
  • FIG. 24 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 99m Tc]SRV134B;
  • FIG. 25 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 99m Tc]SRV134A;
  • FIG. 26 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [ 99m Tc]SRV134B.
  • Minimally invasive medical techniques are intended to reduce the amount of extraneous tissue that is damaged during diagnostic or surgical procedures, thereby reducing patient recovery time, discomfort, and deleterious side effects. While millions of “open” or traditional surgeries are performed each year in the United States; many of these surgeries potentially can be performed in a minimally invasive manner.
  • One effect of minimally invasive surgery is reduced post-operative recovery time and related hospital stay. Because the average hospital stay for a standard surgery is typically significantly longer than the average stay for an analogous minimally invasive surgery, increased use of minimally invasive techniques could save millions of dollars in hospital costs each year. While many of the surgeries performed in the United States could potentially be performed in a minimally invasive manner, only a portion currently employ these techniques due to instrument limitations, method limitations, and the additional surgical training involved in mastering the techniques.
  • Telesurgery is a general term for surgical systems where the surgeon uses some form of remote control, e.g., a servomechanism, or the like, to manipulate surgical instrument movements rather than directly holding and moving the instruments by hand.
  • remote control e.g., a servomechanism, or the like
  • the surgeon is provided with an image of the surgical site at the remote location. While viewing the surgical site on a suitable viewer or display, the surgeon performs the surgical procedures on the patient by manipulating master control input devices, which in turn control the motion of instruments. These input devices can move the working ends of the surgical instruments with sufficient dexterity to perform quite intricate surgical tasks.
  • Surgical techniques including minimally invasive surgical techniques, such as tele-surgical systems, can be further aided by improving visualization of the tissue where the procedure is to be carried out.
  • One way to improve visualization of tissue is through the use of dyes capable of targeted visualization of tissue, allowing a surgeon to either remove or spare the tissue.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides low-molecular-weight compounds comprising PSMA-targeting ligands linked to near-infrared (NIR), closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes and methods of their use for visualizing tissue under illumination with NIR radiation, including methods for imaging prostate cancer (PCa).
  • NIR near-infrared
  • PCa prostate cancer
  • the presently disclosed compounds include a urea-based PSMA binding moiety linked to a DylightTM 800 fluorescent dye (Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc., Rockford, Illinois, USA).
  • the presently disclosed targeted fluorescent PSMA binding compounds may find utility in fluorescence image guided surgery and biopsy of PSMA positive tumors and tissues; the former providing visual confirmation of complete removal of PSMA-containing tissue.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides the following compound:
  • the presently disclosed compounds can be made using procedures known in the art by attaching near IR, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes to prostate specific membrane antigen ligands via a linkage.
  • the prostate specific membrane antigen ligands used in the presently disclosed compounds can be synthesized as described in international PCT patent application publication no. WO 2010/108125, to Pomper et al., published Sep. 23, 2010, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
  • Compounds can assembled by reactions between different components, to form linkages such as ureas (—NRC(O)NR—), thioureas (—NRC(S)NR—), amides (—C(O)NR— or —NRC(O)—), or esters (—C(O)O— or —OC(O)—).
  • Urea linkages can be readily prepared by reaction between an amine and an isocyanate, or between an amine and an activated carbonamide (—NRC(O)—).
  • Thioureas can be readily prepared from reaction of an amine with an isothiocyanate.
  • Amides can be readily prepared by reactions between amines and activated carboxylic acids or esters, such as an acyl halide or N-hydroxysuccinimide ester.
  • Carboxylic acids may also be activated in situ, for example, with a coupling reagent, such as a carbodiimide, or carbonyldiimidazole (CDI).
  • Esters may be formed by reaction between alcohols and activated carboxylic acids.
  • Triazoles are readily prepared by reaction between an azide and an alkyne, optionally in the presence of a copper (Cu) catalyst.
  • Prostate specific membrane antigen ligands can also be prepared by sequentially adding components to a preformed urea, such as the lysine-urea-glutamate compounds described in Banerjee et al. (J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). Other urea-based compounds may also be used as building blocks.
  • a preformed urea such as the lysine-urea-glutamate compounds described in Banerjee et al. (J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008).
  • Other urea-based compounds may also be used as building blocks.
  • the presently disclosed compounds can be synthesized via attachment of near IR, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes to prostate specific membrane antigen ligands by reacting a reactive amine on the ligand with a near IR dye.
  • near IR dyes A wide variety of near IR dyes are known in the art, with activated functional groups for reacting with amines.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a composition comprising a unit dosage form of compound (3), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the composition is adapted for administration to a subject; and wherein, the unit dosage form delivers to the subject an amount between 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of compound (3).
  • the composition unit dosage form delivers to the subject the amount of about 0.01 mg/kg, about 0.05 mg/kg, about 0.10 mg/kg, about 0.20 mg/kg, about 0.30 mg/kg, about 0.35 mg/kg, about 0.40 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg, about 0.50 mg/kg, about 0.55 mg/kg, about 0.60 mg/kg, about 0.65 mg/kg, about 0.70 mg/kg, about 0.75 mg/kg, about 0.80 mg/kg, about 0.90 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg, about 2 mg/kg, about 4 mg/kg, about 6 mg/kg, or about 8 mg/kg.
  • the composition is dry and a single dose form.
  • unit dosage form encompasses any measured amount that can suitably be used for administering a pharmaceutical composition to a patient.
  • another form e.g., another salt the pharmaceutical composition
  • the weight can be adjusted to provide an equivalent amount of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • the composition is lyophilized in a sterile container. In some embodiments, the composition is contained within a sterile container, wherein the container has a machine detectable identifier that is readable by a medical device.
  • sterile refers to a system or components of a system free of infectious agents, including, but not limited to, bacteria, viruses, and bioactive RNA or DNA.
  • non-toxic refers to the non-occurrence of detrimental effects when administered to a vertebrate as a result of using a pharmaceutical composition at levels effective for visualization of tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation (therapeutic levels).
  • machine detectable identifier includes identifiers visible or detectable by machines including medical devices.
  • the medical device is a telesurgical system.
  • Machine detectable identifiers may facilitate the access or utilization of information that is directly encoded in the machine detectable identifier, or stored elsewhere.
  • Examples of machine detectible identifiers include, but are not limited to, microchips, radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, barcodes (e.g., 1-dimensional or 2-dimensional barcode), data matrices, quick-response (QR) codes, and holograms.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • QR quick-response
  • the composition further comprises compound (3) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients in an oral dosage form. In some embodiments, the composition further comprises compound (3) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers in an injectable dosage form. In some embodiments, the composition further comprises compound (3) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients in a dosage form for direct delivery to a surgical site.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” and “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refer to a substance that aids the administration of an active agent to and absorption by a patient and can be included in the presently disclosed compositions without causing a significant adverse toxicological effect on the patient.
  • Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include water, NaCl, normal saline solutions, lactated Ringer's, normal sucrose, normal glucose, binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, coatings, sweeteners, flavors and colors, and the like.
  • pharmaceutical excipients include water, NaCl, normal saline solutions, lactated Ringer's, normal sucrose, normal glucose, binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, coatings, sweeteners, flavors and colors, and the like.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include but not limited to any adjuvants, excipients, glidants, sweeteners, diluents, preservatives, dyes/colorants, flavoring agents, surfactants, wetting agents, dispersing agents, suspending agents, stabilizing agents, isotonic agents, solvents or emulsors.
  • oral dosage form refers to its normal meaning in the art (i.e., a pharmaceutical composition in the form of a tablet, capsule, caplet, gelcap, geltab, pill and the like).
  • injectable dosage form refers to its normal meaning in the art (i.e., refer to a pharmaceutical composition in the form of solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions.)
  • compositions can be prepared in a wide variety of oral, parenteral and topical dosage forms.
  • Oral preparations include tablets, pills, powder, dragees, capsules, liquids, lozenges, cachets, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, etc., suitable for ingestion by the patient.
  • the presently disclosed compositions can also be administered by injection, that is, intravenously, intramuscularly, intracutaneously, subcutaneously, intraduodenally, or intraperitoneally.
  • the compositions described herein can be administered by inhalation, for example, intranasally. Additionally, the presently disclosed compositions can be administered transdermally.
  • compositions of this invention can also be administered by intraocular, insufflation, powders, and aerosol formulations (for examples of steroid inhalants, see Rohatagi, J. Clin. Pharmacol. 35:1187-1193, 1995; Tjwa, Ann. Allergy Asthma Immunol. 75:107-111, 1995). Accordingly, the presently disclosed subject matter also provides pharmaceutical compositions including a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can be either solid or liquid.
  • Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, pills, capsules, cachets, suppositories, and dispersible granules.
  • a solid carrier can be one or more substances, which may also act as diluents, flavoring agents, binders, preservatives, tablet disintegrating agents, or an encapsulating material. Details on techniques for formulation and administration are well described in the scientific and patent literature, see, e.g., the latest edition of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Maack Publishing Co, Easton PA (“Remington's”).
  • the carrier is a finely divided solid, which is in a mixture with the finely divided active component.
  • the active component is mixed with the carrier having the necessary binding properties in suitable proportions and compacted in the shape and size desired.
  • the powders and tablets preferably contain from 5% or 10% to 70% of the compounds of the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • Suitable solid excipients include, but are not limited to, magnesium carbonate; magnesium stearate; talc; pectin; dextrin; starch; tragacanth; a low melting wax; cocoa butter; carbohydrates; sugars including, but not limited to, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol, starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; and gums including arabic and tragacanth; as well as proteins including, but not limited to, gelatin and collagen.
  • disintegrating or solubilizing agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings such as concentrated sugar solutions, which may also contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound (i.e., dosage).
  • Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can also be used orally using, for example, push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • Push-fit capsules can contain the presently disclosed compositions mixed with a filler or binders such as lactose or starches, lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • a filler or binders such as lactose or starches
  • lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate
  • stabilizers optionally, stabilizers.
  • the presently disclosed compositions may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
  • Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions.
  • liquid preparations can be formulated in solution in aqueous polyethylene glycol solution.
  • Aqueous solutions suitable for oral use can be prepared by dissolving the presently disclosed compositions in water and adding suitable colorants, flavors, stabilizers, and thickening agents as desired.
  • Aqueous suspensions suitable for oral use can be made by dispersing the finely divided active component in water with viscous material, such as natural or synthetic gums, resins, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethylene oxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a
  • the aqueous suspension can also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose, aspartame or saccharin.
  • preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate
  • coloring agents such as a coloring agent
  • flavoring agents such as aqueous suspension
  • sweetening agents such as sucrose, aspartame or saccharin.
  • Formulations can be adjusted for osmolarity.
  • solid form preparations which are intended to be converted, shortly before use, to liquid form preparations for oral administration.
  • liquid forms include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions.
  • These preparations may contain, in addition to the active component, colorants, flavors, stabilizers, buffers, artificial and natural sweeteners, dispersants, thickeners, solubilizing agents, and the like.
  • Oil suspensions can be formulated by suspending the presently disclosed compositions in a vegetable oil, such as arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin; or a mixture of these.
  • the oil suspensions can contain a thickening agent, such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
  • Sweetening agents can be added to provide a palatable oral preparation, such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • These formulations can be preserved by the addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • an injectable oil vehicle see Minto, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 281:93-102, 1997.
  • the pharmaceutical formulations of the invention can also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase can be a vegetable oil or a mineral oil, described above, or a mixture of these.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums, such as gum acacia and gum tragacanth, naturally occurring phosphatides, such as soybean lecithin, esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, such as sorbitan mono-oleate, and condensation products of these partial esters with ethylene oxide, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan mono-oleate.
  • the emulsion can also contain sweetening agents and flavoring agents, as in the formulation of syrups and elixirs. Such formulations can also contain a demulcent, a preservative, or a coloring agent.
  • compositions can also be delivered as microspheres for slow release in the body.
  • microspheres can be formulated for administration via intradermal injection of drug-containing microspheres, which slowly release subcutaneously (see Rao, J. Biomater Sci. Polym. Ed. 7:623-645, 1995; as biodegradable and injectable gel formulations (see, e.g., Gao Pharm. Res. 12:857-863, 1995); or, as microspheres for oral administration (see, e.g., Eyles, J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 49:669-674, 1997). Both transdermal and intradermal routes afford constant delivery for weeks or months.
  • the presently disclosed compositions can be formulated for parenteral administration, such as intravenous (IV) administration or administration into a body cavity or lumen of an organ.
  • parenteral administration such as intravenous (IV) administration or administration into a body cavity or lumen of an organ.
  • the formulations for administration will commonly comprise a solution of the presently disclosed compositions dissolved in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water and Ringer's solution, an isotonic sodium chloride.
  • sterile fixed oils can conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid can likewise be used in the preparation of injectables. These solutions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter.
  • formulations may be sterilized by conventional, well-known techniques including radiation, chemical, heat/pressure, and filtration sterilization techniques.
  • the formulations may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, toxicity adjusting agents, e.g., sodium acetate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium lactate and the like.
  • concentration of the presently disclosed compositions in these formulations can vary widely, and will be selected primarily based on fluid volumes, viscosities, body weight, and the like, in accordance with the particular mode of administration selected and the patient's needs.
  • the formulation can be a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • This suspension can be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution of 1,3-butanediol.
  • the formulations of the presently disclosed compositions can be delivered by the use of liposomes which fuse with the cellular membrane or are endocytosed, i.e., by employing ligands attached to the liposome, or attached directly to the oligonucleotide, that bind to surface membrane protein receptors of the cell resulting in endocytosis.
  • liposomes particularly where the liposome surface carries ligands specific for target cells, or are otherwise preferentially directed to a specific organ, one can focus the delivery of the presently disclosed compositions into the target cells in vivo.
  • Lipid-based drug delivery systems include lipid solutions, lipid emulsions, lipid dispersions, self-emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS) and self-microemulsifying drug delivery systems (SMEDDS).
  • SEDDS and SMEDDS are isotropic mixtures of lipids, surfactants and co-surfactants that can disperse spontaneously in aqueous media and form fine emulsions (SEDDS) or microemulsions (SMEDDS).
  • Lipids useful in the formulations of the presently disclosed subject matter include any natural or synthetic lipids including, but not limited to, sesame seed oil, olive oil, castor oil, peanut oil, fatty acid esters, glycerol esters, Labrafil®, Labrasol®, Cremophor®, Solutol®, Tween®, Capryol®, Capmul®, Captex®, and Peceol®.
  • compositions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter.
  • the compounds and compositions may be sterilized by conventional, well known techniques including heat/pressure, gas plasma, steam, radiation, chemical, and filtration sterilization techniques.
  • terminal heat sterilization can be used to destroy all viable microorganisms within the final formulation.
  • An autoclave is commonly used to accomplish terminal heat-sterilization of drug products in their final packaging. Typical autoclave cycles in the pharmaceutical industry to achieve terminal sterilization of the final product are 121° C. for 15 minutes.
  • the presently disclosed compositions can be autoclaved at a temperature ranging from 115 to 130° C. for a period of time ranging from 5 to 40 minutes with acceptable stability. Autoclaving is preferably carried out in the temperature range of 119 to 122° C. for a period of time ranging from 10 to 36 minutes.
  • compositions can also be sterilized by dry heat as described by Karlsson, et al., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,392,036, which discloses a method for the dry heat sterilization that can be used for drug formulations.
  • the compositions can also be sterilized as described in WO 02/41925 to Breath Limited, which discloses a rapid method, similar to pasteurization, for the sterilization of compositions. This method entails pumping the composition to be sterilized through stainless steel pipes and rapidly raising the temperature of the composition to about 130-145° C. for about 2-20 seconds, subsequently followed by rapid cooling in seconds to ambient conditions.
  • compositions can also be sterilized by irradiation as described by Illum and Moeller in Arch. Pharm. Chem. Sci ., Ed. 2, 1974, pp. 167-174).
  • the compositions can also be sterilized by UV, x-rays, gamma rays, e beam radiation, flaming, baking, and chemical sterilization.
  • sterile pharmaceutical compositions may be prepared using aseptic processing techniques. Aseptic filling is ordinarily used to prepare drug products that will not withstand heat sterilization, but in which all of the ingredients are sterile. Sterility is maintained by using sterile materials and a controlled working environment. All containers and apparatus are sterilized, preferably by heat sterilization, prior to filling. The container (e.g., vial, ampoule, infusion bag, bottle, or syringe) are then filled under aseptic conditions.
  • Aseptic filling is ordinarily used to prepare drug products that will not withstand heat sterilization, but in which all of the ingredients are sterile. Sterility is maintained by using sterile materials and a controlled working environment. All containers and apparatus are sterilized, preferably by heat sterilization, prior to filling. The container (e.g., vial, ampoule, infusion bag, bottle, or syringe) are then filled under aseptic conditions.
  • the compounds and presently disclosed compositions are non-toxic and generally free of detrimental effects when administered to a vertebrate at levels effective for visualization of tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation. Toxicity of the compounds and presently disclosed compositions can be assessed by measuring their effects on a target (organism, organ, tissue or cell). Because individual targets typically have different levels of response to the same dose of a compound, a population-level measure of toxicity is often used which relates the probabilities of an outcome for a given individual in a population. Toxicology of compounds can be determined by conventional, well-known techniques including in vitro (outside of a living organism) and in vivo (inside of a living organism) studies.
  • metabolic stability is commonly examined when assessing the toxicity of a compound as it is one of several major determinates in defining the oral bioavailability and systemic clearance of a compound.
  • a compound After a compound is administered orally, it first encounters metabolic enzymes in the gastrointestinal lumen as well as in the intestinal epithelium. After it is absorbed into the bloodstream through the intestinal epithelium, it is first delivered to the liver via the portal vein.
  • a compound can be effectively cleared by intestinal or hepatic metabolism before it reaches systemic circulation, a process known as first pass metabolism.
  • the stability of a compound towards metabolism within the liver as well as extrahepatic tissues will ultimately determine the concentration of the compound found in the systemic circulation and affect its half-life and residence time within the body.
  • Cytochrome P450 (CYP) enzymes are found primarily in the liver but also in the intestinal wall, lungs, kidneys and other extrahepatic organs and are the major enzymes involved in compound metabolism. Many compounds undergo deactivation by CYPs, either directly or by facilitated excretion from the body. Also, many compounds are bioactivated by CYPs to form their active compounds. Thus, determining the reactivity of a compound to CYP enzymes is commonly used to assess metabolic stability of a compound.
  • the Ames reverse mutation Assay is another common toxicology assay for assessing the toxicity of a compound.
  • the Ames Assay utilizes several different tester strains, each with a distinct mutation in one of the genes comprising the histidine (his) biosynthetic operon (Ames, B. N., et al., (1975) Mutation Res. 31:347-363).
  • the detection of revertant (i.e., mutant) bacteria in test samples that are capable of growth in the absence of histidine indicates that the compound under evaluation is characterized by genotoxic (i.e. mutagenic) activity.
  • the Ames Assay is capable of detecting several different types of mutations (genetic damage) that may occur in one or more of the tester strains.
  • the practice of using an in vitro bacterial assay to evaluate the genotoxic activity of drug candidates is based on the prediction that a substance that is mutagenic in a bacterium is likely to be carcinogenic in laboratory animals, and by extension may be carcinogenic or mutagenic to humans.
  • the human ether-a-go-go related gene (hERG) assay can be used to evaluate the potential cardiotoxicity of a compound. Cardiotoxicity can arise when the QT interval is prolonged leading to an elevated risk of life-threatening arrhythmias.
  • the QT interval is a measure of the time between the start of the Q wave and the end of the T wave in the heart's electrical cycle.
  • the QT interval represents electrical depolarization and repolarization of the ventricles.
  • a lengthened QT interval has most commonly been associated with loss of current through hERG potassium ion channels due to direct block of the ion channel by drugs or by inhibition of the plasma membrane expression of the channel protein (Su et al. J. Biomol Screen 2011, 16, 101-111).
  • an in vitro hERG screening assay can be used to detect disruption or inhibition of the hERG membrane trafficking function and assess potential cardiotoxicity of a compound.
  • Toxicity of a compound can also be assessed in vivo by examining whether a compound produces statistically significant negative effects on cardiac, blood pressure, central nervous system (CNS), body weight, food intake, gross or microscopic pathology, clinical pathology, or respiratory measures in an animal.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • the presently disclosed compositions can be lyophilized in a sterile container for convenient dry storage and transport.
  • a ready-to-use preparation can subsequently be made by reconstituting the lyophilized compositions with sterile water.
  • the terms “lyophilization,” “lyophilized,” and “freeze-dried” refer to a process by which the material to be dried is first frozen and then the ice or frozen solvent is removed by sublimation in a vacuum environment. An excipient may be included in pre-lyophilized formulations to enhance stability of the lyophilized product upon storage.
  • the composition can be contained within a sterile container, where the container has a machine detectable identifier which is readable by a medical device.
  • machine detectible identifiers include microchips, radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, barcodes (e.g., 1-dimensional or 2-dimensional barcode), data matrices, quick-response (QR) codes, and holograms.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • QR quick-response
  • holograms One of skill in the art will recognize that other machine detectible identifiers are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • the machine detectable identifier can include a microchip, an integrated circuit (IC) chip, or an electronic signal from a microchip that is detectable and/or readable by a computer system that is in communication with the medical device.
  • the machine detectable identifier includes a radio frequency identification (RFID) tag.
  • RFID tags are sometimes called as transponders.
  • RFID tags generally are devices formed of an IC chip, an antenna, an adhesive material, and are used for transmitting or receiving predetermined data with an external reader or interrogator.
  • RFID tags can transmit or receive data with a reader by using a contactless method. According to the amplitude of a used frequency, inductive coupling, backscattering, and surface acoustic wave (SAW) may be used.
  • SAW surface acoustic wave
  • Using electromagnetic waves data may be transmitted or received to or from a reader by using a full duplex method, a half duplex (HDX) method, or a sequential (SEQ) method.
  • the machine detectable identifier can include a barcode.
  • Barcodes include any machine-readable format, including one-dimensional and two-dimensional formats.
  • One-dimensional formats include, for example, Universal Product Code (UPC) and Reduced Space Symbology (RSS).
  • Two-dimensional formats, or machine-readable matrices include for example, Quick Response (QR) Code and Data Matrix.
  • the medical device can be configured to detect the machine detectable identifier.
  • the medical device is a tele-surgical system that includes a special imaging mode (e.g., a fluorescence imaging mode) for use with dyes such as those described in this disclosure.
  • a fluorescence imaging mode e.g., a fluorescence imaging mode
  • a fluorescence imaging mode is described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,169,468, entitled “Augmented Stereoscopic Visualization for a Surgical Robot,” which is hereby incorporated in its entirety herein.
  • medical devices can incorporate an imaging device that can scan, read, view, or otherwise detect a machine detectable identifier that is displayed to the imaging device.
  • the medical device will permit a user to access the fluorescence imaging mode of the medical device only if the medical device detects the presence of a known machine detectable identifier that corresponds to a dye identified as being compatible for use with the medical device. In contrast, if the medical device does not detect a known machine detectable identifier, the medical device will not permit a user to access the fluorescence imaging mode and associated functionality.
  • Imaging devices can include optical scanners, barcode readers, cameras, and imaging devices contained within a tele-surgical system such as an endoscope. Information associated with the machine detectable identifier can then be retrieved by the medical device using an imaging device.
  • an automatic process may be launched to cause a predetermined action to occur, or certain data to be retrieved or accessed.
  • the information encoded onto the machine detectable identifier may include instructions for triggering an action, such as administering a composition of the presently disclosed subject matter to a patient.
  • the machine detectable identifier includes unencrypted e-pedigree information in the desired format.
  • the e-pedigree information can include, for example, lot, potency, expiration, national drug code, electronic product code, manufacturer, distributor, wholesaler, pharmacy and/or a unique identifier of the salable unit.
  • the sterile container having a machine detectable identifier includes a fluid outlet configured to mate with the medical device.
  • the fluid outlet of the machine detectable identifier is mechanically affixed to the medical device.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a use of the composition comprising compound (3), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, adapted for administration to a subject, e.g., a patient, to obtain visualization of tissue expressing PSMA under illumination with near-infrared radiation, wherein the unit dosage form delivers to the subject an amount between about 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of compound (3).
  • the use is adapted for administration to a human patient to obtain visualization of human tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation wherein the unit dosage form delivers to the human patient an amount between about 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of a compound (3).
  • compositions can be delivered by any suitable means, including oral, parenteral and topical methods.
  • Transdermal administration methods by a topical route, can be formulated as applicator sticks, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, gels, creams, ointments, pastes, jellies, paints, powders, and aerosol.
  • the pharmaceutical preparation is preferably in unit dosage form.
  • the preparation is subdivided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the compounds and presently disclosed compositions.
  • the unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of preparation, such as packeted tablets, capsules, and powders in vials or ampoules.
  • the unit dosage form can be a capsule, tablet, cachet, or lozenge itself, or it can be the appropriate number of any of these in packaged form.
  • co-administration can be accomplished by co-formulation, i.e., preparing a single pharmaceutical composition including the compounds and presently disclosed compositions and any other agent.
  • co-formulation i.e., preparing a single pharmaceutical composition including the compounds and presently disclosed compositions and any other agent.
  • the various components can be formulated separately.
  • compositions, and any other agents can be present in any suitable amount, and can depend on various factors including, but not limited to, weight and age of the patient, state of the disease, etc.
  • Suitable dosage ranges include from about 0.01 and 8 mg/kg, or about 0.01 and 5 mg/kg, or about 0.01 and 1 mg/kg.
  • Suitable dosage ranges also include 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.90, 1, 2, 4, 6, or 8 mg/kg.
  • composition can also contain other compatible compositions.
  • the compositions described herein can be used in combination with one another, with other active compositions known to be useful for visualization of tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation, or with compositions that may not be effective alone, but may contribute to the efficacy of the active composition.
  • visualization refers to methods of obtaining graphic images of tissue by any means, including illumination with near-infrared radiation.
  • near-infrared radiation or “near IR radiation” or “NIR” radiation refers to optical radiation with a wavelength in the range of about 700 nm to about 1400 nm. References herein to the optionally plural term “wavelength(s)” indicates that the radiation may be a single wavelength or a spectrum of radiation having differing wavelengths.
  • tissue as used herein includes, but is not limited to, allogenic or xenogenic bone, neural tissue, fibrous connective tissue including tendons and ligaments, cartilage, dura, fascia, pericardia, muscle, heart valves, veins and arteries and other vessels, dermis, adipose tissue, glandular tissue, prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, renal tissue, bladder tissue, lung tissue, breast tissue, pancreatic tissue, vascular tissue, tumor tissue, cancerous tissue, or prostate tumor tissue.
  • connective tissue including tendons and ligaments, cartilage, dura, fascia, pericardia, muscle, heart valves, veins and arteries and other vessels, dermis, adipose tissue, glandular tissue, prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, renal tissue, bladder tissue, lung tissue, breast tissue, pancreatic tissue, vascular tissue, tumor tissue, cancerous tissue, or prostate tumor tissue.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for visualization of tissue expressing PSMA, the method comprising, administering to a subject, e.g., a patient, a composition comprising compound (3), described herein.
  • the method comprises, administering to a subject a composition comprising compound (3):
  • the method administers to a subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a unit dosage form of compound (3), wherein the composition is sterile, non-toxic, and adapted for administration to a subject; and wherein, the unit dosage form delivers to the subject an amount between about 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of compound (3).
  • the method further comprises obtaining the image during administration, after administration, or both during and after administration of the composition.
  • the method further comprises intravenously injecting a composition comprising compound (3) into a subject.
  • the composition is injected into a circulatory system of the subject.
  • the method further comprises visualizing a subject area on which surgery is or will be performed, or for viewing a subject area otherwise being examined by a medical professional. In some embodiments, the method further comprises performing a surgical procedure on the subject areas based on the visualization of the surgical area. In some embodiments, the method further comprises viewing a subject area on which an ophthalmic, arthroscopic, laparoscopic, cardiothoracic, muscular, or neurological procedure is or will be performed. In some embodiments, the method further comprises obtaining ex vivo images of at least a portion of the subject.
  • the tissue being visualized is tumor tissue. In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is dysplastic or cancerous tissue. In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is prostate tissue. In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is prostate tumor tissue.
  • the one or more PSMA-expressing tumor or cell is selected from the group consisting of: a prostate tumor or cell, a metastasized prostate tumor or cell, a lung tumor or cell, a renal tumor or cell, a glioblastoma, a pancreatic tumor or cell, a bladder tumor or cell, a sarcoma, a melanoma, a breast tumor or cell, a colon tumor or cell, a germ cell, a pheochromocytoma, an esophageal tumor or cell, a stomach tumor or cell, and combinations thereof.
  • the one or more PSMA-expressing tumor or cell is a prostate tumor or cell.
  • the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells are in vitro, in vivo, or ex vivo.
  • the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells are present in a subject.
  • a “subject” treated by the presently disclosed methods in their many embodiments is desirably a human subject, although it is to be understood that the methods described herein are effective with respect to all vertebrate species, which are intended to be included in the term “subject.” Accordingly, a “subject” can include a human subject for medical purposes, such as for the treatment of an existing condition or disease or the prophylactic treatment for preventing the onset of a condition or disease, or an animal subject for medical, veterinary purposes, or developmental purposes.
  • Suitable animal subjects include mammals including, but not limited to, primates, e.g., humans, monkeys, apes, and the like; bovines, e.g., cattle, oxen, and the like; ovines, e.g., sheep and the like; caprines, e.g., goats and the like; porcines, e.g., pigs, hogs, and the like; equines, e.g., horses, donkeys, zebras, and the like; felines, including wild and domestic cats; canines, including dogs; lagomorphs, including rabbits, hares, and the like; and rodents, including mice, rats, and the like.
  • mammals including, but not limited to, primates, e.g., humans, monkeys, apes, and the like; bovines, e.g., cattle, oxen, and the like; ovines, e.g., sheep and the like; cap
  • an animal may be a transgenic animal.
  • the subject is a human including, but not limited to, fetal, neonatal, infant, juvenile, and adult subjects.
  • a “subject” can include a patient afflicted with or suspected of being afflicted with a condition or disease.
  • the terms “subject” and “patient” are used interchangeably herein.
  • the term “subject” also refers to an organism, tissue, cell, or collection of cells from a subject.
  • the “effective amount” of an active agent refers to the amount necessary to elicit the desired biological response.
  • the effective amount of an agent or device may vary depending on such factors as the desired biological endpoint, the agent to be delivered, the makeup of the pharmaceutical composition, the target tissue, and the like.
  • compound (3) is cleared from the subject's kidneys in about 24 hours.
  • the presently disclosed methods use compounds that are stable in vivo such that substantially all, e.g., more than about 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or more preferably 90% of the injected compound is not metabolized by the body prior to excretion.
  • the compound comprising the imaging agent is stable in vivo.
  • Z is tetrazole or CO 2 Q; each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group; FG is a fluorescent dye moiety which emits in the visible or near infrared spectrum; each R is independently H or C 1 -C 4 alkyl; V is —C(O)—; W is —NRC(O); Y is —C(O); a is 1, 2, 3, or 4; m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R 1 may be the same or different; R 1 is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 6 -C 12 aryl, or alkylaryl having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms; R 2 and R 3 are independently H, CO 2 H, or CO 2 R 4 , where R 4 is a C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 6 -C 12 aryl, or alkyla
  • a “protecting group” is a chemical substituent which can be selectively removed by readily available reagents which do not attack the regenerated functional group or other functional groups in the molecule.
  • Suitable protecting groups are known in the art and continue to be developed. Suitable protecting groups may be found, for example in Wutz et al. (“Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Fourth Edition,” Wiley-Interscience, 2007). Protecting groups for protection of the carboxyl group, as described by Wutz et al. (pages 533-643), are used in certain embodiments. In some embodiments, the protecting group is removable by treatment with acid.
  • protecting groups include but are not limited to, benzyl, p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), tertiary butyl (t-Bu), methoxymethyl (MOM), methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), tetrahydrofuranyl (THF), benzyloxymethyl (BOM), trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), and triphenylmethyl (trityl, Tr).
  • PMB p-methoxybenzyl
  • t-Bu tertiary butyl
  • MOM methoxymethyl
  • MTM methoxyethoxymethyl
  • THF tetrahydrofuranyl
  • BOM benzyloxymethyl
  • TMS trimethylsilyl
  • TES triethylsilyl
  • TDMS t-but
  • the compound has the following structure:
  • the compound has the following structure:
  • the compound has the following structure
  • R 3 is CO 2 H and R 2 is H or R 2 is CO 2 H and R 3 is H.
  • R 2 is CO 2 R 4 and R 3 is H or R 3 is CO 2 R 4 , and R 2 is H.
  • R 2 is H, and R 3 is H.
  • R 4 is C 6 -C 12 aryl, or alkylaryl having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms.
  • R 1 is C 6 -C 12 aryl.
  • R 1 is phenyl
  • FG is a fluorescent dye moiety which emits in the near infrared spectrum.
  • FG comprises a fluorescent dye moiety selected from the group consisting of carbocyanine, indocarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine, thiacarbocyanine and merocyanine, polymethine, coumarine, rhodamine, xanthene, fluorescein, boron-dipyrromethane (BODIPY), Cy5, Cy5.5, Cy7, VivoTag-680, VivoTag-S680, VivoTag-S750, AlexaFluor660, AlexaFluor680, AlexaFluor700, AlexaFluor750, AlexaFluor790, Dy677, Dy676, Dy682, Dy752, Dy780, DyLight547, Dylight647, HiLyte Fluor 647, HiLyte Fluor 680, HiLyte Fluor 680, HiLyt
  • the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Embodiments include methods of imaging one or more cells, organs or tissues comprising exposing cells to or administering to a subject an effective amount of a compound with an isotopic label suitable for imaging.
  • the one or more organs or tissues include prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, vascular tissue or tumor tissue.
  • the cells, organs or tissues may be imaged while within an organism, either by whole body imaging or intraoperative imaging, or may be excised from the organism for imaging.
  • the imaging method is suitable for imaging studies of PSMA inhibitors, for example, by studying competitive binding of non-radiolabeled inhibitors.
  • the imaging method is suitable for imaging of cancer, tumor or neoplasm.
  • the cancer is selected from eye or ocular cancer, rectal cancer, colon cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and bladder cancer, oral cancer, benign and malignant tumors, stomach cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, corpus uteri, ovary cancer, prostate cancer, testicular cancer, renal cancer, brain cancer (e.g., gliomas), throat cancer, skin melanoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, Ewing's Sarcoma, Kaposi's Sarcoma, basal cell carcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma, small cell lung cancer, choriocarcinoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, angiosarcoma, hemangioendotheliom
  • the imaging methods of the invention are suitable for imaging any physiological process or feature in which PSMA is involved. Typically, imaging methods are suitable for identification of areas of tissues or targets which express high concentrations of PSMA. Typical applications include imaging glutamateric neurotransmission, presynaptic glutamatergic neurotransmission, malignant tumors or cancers that express PSMA, prostate cancer (including metastasized prostate cancer), and angiogenesis. Essentially all solid tumors express PSMA in the neovasculture.
  • methods of the present invention can be used to image nearly all solid tumors including lung, renal cell, glioblastoma, pancreas, bladder, sarcoma, melanoma, breast, colon, germ cell, pheochromocytoma, esophageal and stomach. Also, certain benign lesions and tissues including endometrium, schwannoma and Barrett's esophagus can be imaged according to the present invention.
  • the methods of imaging angiogenesis are suitable for use in imaging a variety of diseases and disorders in which angiogenesis takes place.
  • Illustrative, non-limiting, examples include tumors, collagen vascular disease, cancer, stroke, vascular malformations, and retinopathy.
  • Methods of imaging angiogenesis are also suitable for use in diagnosis and observation of normal tissue development.
  • PSMA is frequently expressed in endothelial cells of capillary vessels in peritumoral and endotumoral areas of various malignancies such that compounds of the invention and methods of imaging using same are suitable for imaging such malignancies.
  • Imaging agents of the invention may be used in accordance with the methods of the invention by one of skill in the art. Images can be generated by virtue of differences in the spatial distribution of the imaging agents which accumulate at a site when contacted with PSMA.
  • the spatial distribution may be measured using any means suitable for the particular label, for example, a fluorescence camera and the like.
  • a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent is administered to a subject.
  • a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent is defined as an amount sufficient to yield an acceptable image using equipment which is available for clinical use.
  • a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent may be administered in more than one injection.
  • the detectably effective amount of the imaging agent can vary according to factors such as the degree of susceptibility of the individual, the age, sex, and weight of the individual, idiosyncratic responses of the individual, and the dosimetry. Detectably effective amounts of the imaging agent can also vary according to instrument and film-related factors. Optimization of such factors is well within the level of skill in the art.
  • the amount of imaging agent used for diagnostic purposes and the duration of the imaging study will depend upon the radionuclide used to label the agent, the body mass of the patient, the nature and severity of the condition being treated, the nature of therapeutic treatments which the patient has undergone, and on the idiosyncratic responses of the patient. Ultimately, the attending physician will decide the amount of imaging agent to administer to each individual patient and the duration of the imaging study.
  • the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body quickly. Generally, the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body slowly enough to allow sufficient time for imaging or other use. Typically compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 24 hours. More typically, compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 16 hours, 12 hours, 8 hours, 6 hours, 4 hours, 2 hours, 90 minutes, or 60 minutes. Exemplary compounds are eliminated in between about 60 minutes and about 120 minutes.
  • the compounds are designed to increase uptake in PSMA positive cells (i.e., tumor cells).
  • PSMA positive cells i.e., tumor cells
  • highly hydrophilic compounds may be excreted quickly.
  • Compounds with increased hydrophobicity such as compounds having hydrophobic linkers, may have longer circulation times, thereby providing more prolonged supply of tracer to bind to cells.
  • hydrophobicity can be increased when, for example, p is 1 or more, or when R 2 or R 3 is CO 2 R 4 .
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method of imaging one or more cells, organs or tissues by exposing the cell to or administering to an organism an effective amount of a presently disclosed compound, where the compound includes a fluorescent dye moiety suitable for imaging.
  • Embodiments include methods for sorting cells by exposing the cells to a compound discussed above, where the compound includes a fluorescent dye moiety, followed by separating cells which bind the compound from cells which do not bind the compound.
  • Fluorescent compounds described above bind to PSMA on cells that express PSMA on the cell surface.
  • fluorescent compound is internalized. Cells binding the fluorescent compound appear fluorescent, and may be imaged using fluorescence microscopy. Fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS) or flow cytometry may be used to separate PSMA positive cells from PSMA negative cells.
  • FACS Fluorescence-activated cell sorting
  • flow cytometry may be used to separate PSMA positive cells from PSMA negative cells.
  • Intraoperative Tumor Mapping Embodiments of the invention include methods of intraoperative tumor mapping or intraoperative photodiagnosis (PDD) by administering an effective amount of a compound discussed above to a subject, where the compound includes a fluorescent dye moiety.
  • an effective amount of a compound is an amount sufficient to produce a detectable level of fluorescence when used for intraoperative tumor mapping or PDD.
  • the compounds bind to, and may be internalized into, cells, particularly tumor cells, that express PSMA.
  • the fluorescent compounds thereby define the boundaries of the tumor, allowing for accurate surgical removal.
  • the compounds that includes a fluorescent dye moiety may also be used to visualize circulating tumor cells that express PSMA.
  • kits including a compound according to the invention.
  • the kit provides packaged pharmaceutical compositions having a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the invention.
  • the packaged pharmaceutical composition will include the reaction precursors necessary to generate the compound of the invention.
  • Other packaged pharmaceutical compositions provided by the present invention further comprise indicia comprising at least one of: instructions for preparing compounds according to the invention from supplied precursors, instructions for using the composition to image cells or tissues expressing PSMA, or instructions for using the composition to image glutamatergic neurotransmission in a patient suffering from a stress-related disorder, or instructions for using the composition to image prostate cancer.
  • the imaging agent and carrier may be provided in solution or in lyophilized form.
  • the kit may optionally contain a sterile and physiologically acceptable reconstitution medium such as water, saline, buffered saline, and the like.
  • the kit may provide a compound of the invention in solution or in lyophilized form, and these components of the kit of the invention may optionally contain stabilizers such as NaCl, silicate, phosphate buffers, ascorbic acid, gentisic acid, and the like. Additional stabilization of kit components may be provided in this embodiment, for example, by providing the reducing agent in an oxidation-resistant form. Determination and optimization of such stabilizers and stabilization methods are well within the level of skill in the art.
  • Z is CO 2 Q. In some of the following embodiments, Q is H. In some of the following embodiments, m is 4, 5, or 6. In some of the following embodiments, m is 6. In some of the following embodiments, n is 2, 3, or 4. In some of the following embodiments, n is 3. In some of the following embodiments, a is 3 or 4. In some of the following embodiments, a is 4. In some of the following embodiments, Y is —C(O)—. In some of the following embodiments, W is —NHC(O)—.
  • Z is tetrazole or CO 2 Q; each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group, a is 1, 2, 3, or 4, and R is each independently H or C 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • Tz is a triazole group selected from the group consisting of
  • L 2 is f-(CH 2 ) b — or
  • Variable p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R 1 may be the same or different.
  • R 1 is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 aryl, or C 4 -C 16 alkylaryl.
  • G is a moiety selected from the group consisting of
  • Z is CO 2 Q.
  • Q is H.
  • m is 4, 5, or 6.
  • m is 6.
  • n is 2, 3, or 4.
  • n is 3.
  • a is 4.
  • subunits associated with elements p, q and s are in the order drawn and r may be in any location, including between one of p, q, or s. In some embodiments r is 0.
  • the compound has the structure shown below.
  • the compound has the structure shown below.
  • p is 1, 2 or 3.
  • each R 1 may be the same or different.
  • the two may be in any order.
  • p is 2.
  • p is 2, and both R 1 are the same.
  • R 1 is C 2 -C 12 aryl.
  • R 1 is phenyl.
  • R 3 is CO 2 H and R 2 is H.
  • R 2 is CO 2 H and R 3 is H.
  • R 2 and R 3 are both H.
  • p is 0. In some embodiments where p is 0, R 2 is CO 2 R 4 , and R 3 is H. In some embodiments where p is 0, R 3 is CO 2 R 4 , and R 2 is H. In some embodiments R 4 is C 2 -C 12 aryl, or C 4 -C 16 alkylaryl. In some embodiments R 4 is benzyl.
  • Ch is a metal chelating moiety optionally including a chelated metal.
  • a metal chelating moiety is a chemical moiety that non-covalently binds a metal atom, usually with a plurality of non-covalent interactions.
  • Ch includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound. For instance linking groups having alkyl, aryl, combination of alkyl and aryl, or alkyl and aryl groups having heteroatoms may be present in the chelating moiety. Numerous metal chelating moieties are known in the art. Any acceptable chelator can be used with the present invention as long as compatible and capable of chelating a desired metal.
  • Examples of metal chelating moieties include, but are not limited to 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA) and Diethylene-triaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA).
  • DOTA 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid
  • DTPA Diethylene-triaminepentaacetic acid
  • Ch has a structure shown below.
  • Examples of specific compounds include the compounds shown below.
  • the compound further includes a chelated metal.
  • the chelated metal is Tc, In, Ga, Y, Lu, Re, Cu, Ac, Bi, Pb, Sm, Sc, Co, Ho, Gd, Eu, Tb, or Dy.
  • the chelated metal is Tc, Ga, In, Cu, Y, Ac, Lu, Re, or Bi.
  • the metal is an isotope, for example a radioactive isotope.
  • the isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-86, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-64, Cu-67, Co-55, Co-57, Sc-47, Ac-225, Bi-213, Bi-212, Pb-212, Sm-153, Ho-166, or Dy-166.
  • the isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-67, Ac-225, Bi-213, or Bi-212.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a compound having the structure:
  • the compound of formula (I) has the structure:
  • Z is CO 2 Q; each Q is hydrogen; R is H; a is 4; m is 6; n is 3; p is 2; R 1 is C 2 -C 12 aryl, wherein the aryl may be substituted or unsubstituted and R 1 may be the same or different; R 2 is CO 2 H; R 3 is H; W is —NRC(O)—, wherein R is H; V is —C(O)—; and Ch includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound.
  • R 1 is phenyl or a substituted phenyl.
  • R 1 is a phenyl substituted at 1, 2, 3, or 4 positions with a substituent group selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, hydroxyl, nitro, azido, amino, alkanoyl, carboxamido, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, aminoalkyl, carbocyclic aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkoxy, and a saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic heterocyclic group, may be further substituted.
  • R 1 is a phenyl substituted with a halogen and a hydroxyl.
  • the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, aryl, combination of alkyl and aryl, or alkyl and aryl groups having heteroatoms. In certain embodiments, the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, wherein the alkyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • alkyl is intended to include branched, straight-chain, and cyclic saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups.
  • alkyl include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ -propyl, zs ⁇ -propyl, «-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, «-pentyl, and sec-pentyl.
  • alkyl groups are C1-C6 alkyl groups or Ci-C4 alkyl groups. Particular alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, and 3-pentyl.
  • Ci-C6 alkyl as used herein means straight-chain, branched, or cyclic Ci-C6 hydrocarbons which are completely saturated and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl.
  • Examples of Ci-C6 alkyl substituents include methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), propyl (including r ⁇ -propyl (n-Pr, nPr), wo-propyl (i-Pr, 1Pr), and cyclopropyl (c-Pr, 0Pr)), butyl (including r ⁇ -butyl (n-Bu, ′′Bu), zso-butyl (i-Bu, 1Bu), sec-butyl (s-Bu, sBu), tert-butyl (t-Bu, 1Bu), or cyclobutyl (c-Bu, 0Bu)), and so forth.
  • Cycloalkyl is intended to include saturated ring groups, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl. Cycloalkyl groups typically will have 3 to about 8 ring members.
  • (cycloalkyl)alkyl cycloalkyl, and alkyl are as defined above, and the point of attachment is on the alkyl group. This term encompasses, but is not limited to, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, and cyclohexylmethyl.
  • the alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Substituents are not counted towards the total number of atoms in the alkyl group, so long as the total atoms in the substituent(s) are not larger than the alkyl group.
  • aryl includes aromatic groups that contain 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 2 to about 12 carbon atoms, and up to 3 heteroatoms as ring members.
  • heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms.
  • the aryl group may have 0, 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms as ring members.
  • aryl groups include but are not limited to phenyl, biphenyl and naphthyl, including 1-napthyl and 2-naphthyl.
  • aryl groups having heteroatoms include quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, quinazolinyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, triazinyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, and benzothiazolyl, among others.
  • the aryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Substituents are not counted towards the total number of atoms in the aryl group, so long as the total atoms in the substituent(s) are not larger than the aryl group.
  • alkylaryl includes alkyl groups, as defined above, substituted by aryl groups, as defined above.
  • the aryl group may be connected at any point on the alkyl group.
  • C4-Cj6 alkylaryl includes alkylaryl groups having a total of 4 to 16 carbon atoms, counting the carbon atoms on the alkyl group and aryl group together. Examples of alkylaryl groups include but are not limited to benzyl (phenylmethyl), phenyl ethyl, and naphthylmethyl.
  • the alkylaryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Substituents are not counted towards the total number of atoms in the alkylaryl group, so long as the total atoms in the substituent(s) are not larger than the alkylaryl group.
  • substituted means that any one or more hydrogens on the designated atom or group is replaced with a substituent, provided that the designated atom's normal valence is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound.
  • 2 hydrogens on an atom are replaced.
  • the present invention is intended to include all isotopes (including radioisotopes) of atoms occurring in the present compounds. When the compounds are substituted, they may be so substituted at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3 or 4 positions, by one or more suitable groups such as those disclosed herein.
  • Suitable groups that may be present on a “substituted” group include e.g., halogen; cyano; hydroxyl; nitro; azido; amino; alkanoyl (such as a C1-C6 alkanoyl group such as acyl or the like); carboxamido; alkyl groups (including cycloalkyl groups, having 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms); alkenyl and alkynyl groups (including groups having one or more unsaturated linkages and from 2 to about 8, such as 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, carbon atoms); alkoxy groups having one or more oxygen linkages and from 1 to about 8, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms; aryloxy such as phenoxy; alkylthio groups including those having one or more thioether linkages and from 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms; alkylsulfiny
  • benzyl arylalkoxy having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms (e.g. O-benzyl); or a saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic heterocyclic group having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings with 3 to about 8 members per ring and one or more N, O or S atoms, (e.g.
  • an internal substituent is flanked by bonds (for example —NRC(O)—) the order of the atoms is fixed, the orientation of the group may not be reversed, and is inserted into a structure in the orientation presented.
  • —NRC(O)— is not the same as —C(O)NR—.
  • C(O) (for example —NRC(O)—) is used to indicate a carbonyl (C ⁇ O) group, where the oxygen is bonded to the carbon by a double bond.
  • Ch comprises a structure selected from the group consisting of:
  • Ch comprises 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA).
  • DOTA 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid
  • the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Ch includes a chelated metal and the chelated metal comprises a radioactive isotope.
  • the radioactive isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-86, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-64, Cu-67, Co-55, Co-57, Sc-47, Ac-225, Bi-213, Bi-212, Pb-212, Sm-153, Ho-166, or Dy-166.
  • the radioactive isotope is Ga-68 or Lu-177.
  • compositions include pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds described in any of the previous embodiments.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refer to derivatives of the disclosed compounds wherein the parent compound is modified by making non-toxic acid or base salts thereof.
  • examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, mineral or organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines; alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids; and the like.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the conventional non-toxic salts or the quaternary ammonium salts of the parent compound formed, for example, from non-toxic inorganic or organic acids.
  • conventional non-toxic acid salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, pamoic, malefic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicylic, mesylic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isethionic, HOOC—(CH 2 ) n —COOH where n is 0-4, and the like.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric and the like
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting free acid forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base (such as Na, Ca, Mg, or K hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate, or the like), or by reacting free base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate acid.
  • Such reactions are typically carried out in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two.
  • non-aqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used, where practicable. Lists of additional suitable salts may be found, e.g., in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, PA, p. 1418 (1985).
  • the compounds are prepared by sequentially adding components to a preformed urea, such as the lysine-urea-glutamate compounds described in Banerjee et al. (J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008).
  • a preformed urea such as the lysine-urea-glutamate compounds described in Banerjee et al. (J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008).
  • Other urea-based compounds may also be used as building blocks.
  • Linkages such as ureas (—NRC(O)NR—), thioureas (—NRC(S)NR—), amides (—C(O)NR— or —NRC(O)—), or esters (—C(O)O— or —OC(O)—).
  • Urea linkages may be readily prepared by reaction between an amine and an isocyanate, or between an amine and an activated carbonamide (—NRC(O)—).
  • Thioureas may be readily prepared from reaction of an amine with an isothiocyanate.
  • Amides may be readily prepared by reactions between amines and activated carboxylic acids or esters, such as an acyl halide or N-hydroxysuccinimide ester.
  • Carboxylic acids may also be activated in situ, for example, with a coupling reagent, such as a carbodiimide, or carbonyldiimidazole (CDI).
  • Esters may be formed by reaction between alcohols and activated carboxylic acids.
  • Triazoles are readily prepared by reaction between an azide and an alkyne, optionally in the presence of a copper (Cu) catalyst.
  • Protecting groups may be used, if necessary, to protect reactive groups while the compounds are being assembled. Suitable protecting groups, and their removal, will be readily available to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the compounds may be easily prepared from individual building blocks, such as amines, carboxylic acids, and amino acids.
  • a Ch or FB group is placed on the compound by adding a metal chelating group or fluorescent dye to the compound toward the end of a synthesis, for example by reacting a reactive amine on the compound with an activated metal chelating group or fluorescent dye.
  • a metal chelating group or fluorescent dye A wide variety of metal chelating groups and fluorescent dyes are known in the art, with activated functional groups for reacting with amines. The type of metal chelating group will be determined, in part by the desired metal. Selecting a metal chelating group for a particular metal atom will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the fluorescent dye used with be determined, in part, by the desired wavelength of fluorescence, and may be readily selected by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Radiolabeled compounds may be used for diagnostic, imaging, or therapeutic purposes.
  • the suitability of a particular radioisotope for a particular purpose i.e. imaging or therapeutic
  • Other exemplary embodiments are compounds used as precursors for radiolabeled compounds, in which a metal or radioactive isotope of a metal may be added to the compound.
  • Some compounds according to the invention are intermediates for forming other compounds of the invention.
  • Embodiments include methods of imaging one or more cells, organs or tissues comprising exposing cells to or administering to a subject an effective amount of a compound with an isotopic label suitable for imaging.
  • the one or more organs or tissues include prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, vascular tissue or tumor tissue.
  • the cells, organs or tissues may be imaged while within an organism, either by whole body imaging or intraoperative imaging, or may be excised from the organism for imaging.
  • the imaging method is suitable for imaging studies of PSMA inhibitors, for example, by studying competitive binding of non-radiolabeled inhibitors.
  • the imaging method is suitable for imaging of cancer, tumor or neoplasm.
  • the cancer is selected from eye or ocular cancer, rectal cancer, colon cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and bladder cancer, oral cancer, benign and malignant tumors, stomach cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, corpus uteri, ovary cancer, prostate cancer, testicular cancer, renal cancer, brain cancer (e.g., gliomas), throat cancer, skin melanoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, Ewing's Sarcoma, Kaposi's Sarcoma, basal cell carcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma, small cell lung cancer, choriocarcinoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, angiosarcoma, hemangioendotheliom
  • the imaging methods of the invention are suitable for imaging any physiological process or feature in which PSMA is involved. Typically, imaging methods are suitable for identification of areas of tissues or targets which express high concentrations of PSMA. Typical applications include imaging glutamateric neurotransmission, presynaptic glutamatergic neurotransmission, malignant tumors or cancers that express PSMA, prostate cancer (including metastasized prostate cancer), and angiogenesis. Essentially all solid tumors express PSMA in the neovasculture.
  • methods of the present invention can be used to image nearly all solid tumors including lung, renal cell, glioblastoma, pancreas, bladder, sarcoma, melanoma, breast, colon, germ cell, pheochromocytoma, esophageal and stomach. Also, certain benign lesions and tissues including endometrium, schwannoma and Barrett's esophagus can be imaged according to the present invention.
  • the methods of imaging angiogenesis are suitable for use in imaging a variety of diseases and disorders in which angiogenesis takes place.
  • Illustrative, non-limiting, examples include tumors, collagen vascular disease, cancer, stroke, vascular malformations, and retinopathy.
  • Methods of imaging angiogenesis are also suitable for use in diagnosis and observation of normal tissue development.
  • PSMA is frequently expressed in endothelial cells of capillary vessels in peritumoral and endotumoral areas of various malignancies such that compounds of the invention and methods of imaging using same are suitable for imaging such malignancies.
  • the radiolabeled compound is stable in vivo.
  • the radiolabeled compound is detectable by positron emission tomography (PET) or single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computed tomography
  • the subject is a human, rat, mouse, cat, dog, horse, sheep, cow, monkey, avian, or amphibian.
  • the cell is in vivo or in vitro. Typical subjects to which compounds of the invention may be administered will be mammals, particularly primates, especially humans. For veterinary applications, a wide variety of subjects will be suitable, e. g.
  • livestock such as cattle, sheep, goats, cows, swine and the like; poultry such as chickens, ducks, geese, turkeys, and the like; and domesticated animals particularly pets such as dogs and cats.
  • mammals e.g. mice, rats, hamsters
  • rabbits, primates, and swine such as inbred pigs and the like.
  • body fluids and cell samples of the above subjects will be suitable for use such as mammalian, particularly primate such as human, blood, urine or tissue samples, or blood urine or tissue samples of the animals mentioned for veterinary applications.
  • the cells or tissues are present in culture or in suspension.
  • Imaging agents of the invention may be used in accordance with the methods of the invention by one of skill in the art. Images can be generated by virtue of differences in the spatial distribution of the imaging agents which accumulate at a site when contacted with PSMA.
  • the spatial distribution may be measured using any means suitable for the particular label, for example, a gamma camera, a PET apparatus, a SPECT apparatus, a fluorescence camera and the like.
  • the extent of accumulation of the imaging agent may be quantified using known methods for quantifying radioactive emissions.
  • a particularly useful imaging approach employs more than one imaging agent, or a bimodal agent having a fluorescent dye moiety and a metal chelating group, such as those described above, to perform simultaneous studies.
  • a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent is administered to a subject.
  • a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent is defined as an amount sufficient to yield an acceptable image using equipment which is available for clinical use.
  • a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent may be administered in more than one injection.
  • the detectably effective amount of the imaging agent can vary according to factors such as the degree of susceptibility of the individual, the age, sex, and weight of the individual, idiosyncratic responses of the individual, and the dosimetry. Detectably effective amounts of the imaging agent can also vary according to instrument and film-related factors. Optimization of such factors is well within the level of skill in the art.
  • the amount of imaging agent used for diagnostic purposes and the duration of the imaging study will depend upon the radionuclide used to label the agent, the body mass of the patient, the nature and severity of the condition being treated, the nature of therapeutic treatments which the patient has undergone, and on the idiosyncratic responses of the patient. Ultimately, the attending physician will decide the amount of imaging agent to administer to each individual patient and the duration of the imaging study.
  • the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body quickly to prevent prolonged exposure to the radiation of the radiolabeled compound administered to the patient.
  • the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body slowly enough to allow sufficient time for imaging or other use.
  • compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 24 hours. More typically, compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 16 hours, 12 hours, 8 hours, 6 hours, 4 hours, 2 hours, 90 minutes, or 60 minutes. Exemplary compounds are eliminated in between about 60 minutes and about 120 minutes.
  • the compounds are designed to increase uptake in PSMA positive cells (i.e. tumor cells).
  • PSMA positive cells i.e. tumor cells
  • highly hydrophilic compounds may be excreted quickly.
  • Compounds with increased hydrophobicity such as compounds having hydrophobic linkers, may have longer circulation times, thereby providing more prolonged supply of tracer to bind to cells.
  • hydrophobicity can be increased when, for example, p is 1 or more, or when R 2 or R 3 is CO 2 R 4
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for imaging one or more prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) tumors, or cells the method comprising contacting the one or more tumors, or cells, with an effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and making an image.
  • PSMA prostate-specific membrane antigen
  • the imaging comprises positron emission tomography (PET).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells is selected from the group consisting of a prostate tumor or cell, a metastasized prostate tumor or cell, a lung tumor or cell, a renal tumor or cell, a glioblastoma, a pancreatic tumor or cell, a bladder tumor or cell, a sarcoma, a melanoma, a breast tumor or cell, a colon tumor or cell, a germ cell, a pheochromocytoma, an esophageal tumor or cell, a stomach tumor or cell, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiments of the invention include methods of treating a tumor comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound discussed above, where the compound includes a therapeutically effective radioisotope.
  • the development of low molecular weight radiotherapeutic agents is much different from developing radiopharmaceuticals for imaging in that longer tumor residence times may be important for the former.
  • the tumor cells may express PSMA, such as prostate tumor cells or metastasized prostate tumor cells.
  • a tumor may be treated by targeting adjacent or nearby cells which express PSMA.
  • vascular cells undergoing angiogenesis associated with a tumor may be targeted.
  • Essentially all solid tumors express PSMA in the neovasculture. Therefore, methods of the present invention can be used to treat nearly all solid tumors including lung, renal cell, glioblastoma, pancreas, bladder, sarcoma, melanoma, breast, colon, germ cell, pheochromocytoma, esophageal and stomach.
  • certain benign lesions and tissues including endometrium, schwannoma and Barrett's esophagus can be treated according to the present invention.
  • therapeutically effective radioisotopes include 90 Y, 117 Lu, 186 Re, 188 Re, 67 Cu, 225 Ac, 213 Bi, 212 Br, 67 Ga, 111 In, 153 Sm, 212 Pb, 131 I and 211 At.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for treating a tumor comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound includes a therapeutically effective radioisotope.
  • compositions can be assembled as a kit.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprises an effective amount (e.g., a pharmaceutically effective amount, or detectably effective amount) of a compound described above.
  • a composition of the invention can be formulated as a pharmaceutical composition, which comprises a compound of the invention and pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is meant a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e., the material may be administered to a subject without causing any undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the other components of the pharmaceutical composition in which it is contained.
  • the carrier would naturally be selected to minimize any degradation of the active ingredient and to minimize any adverse side effects in the subject, as would be well known to one of skill in the art.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and other components of pharmaceutical compositions see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18 l ed., Mack Publishing Company, 1990.
  • suitable pharmaceutical carriers include, e.g., water (including sterile and/or deionized water), suitable buffers (such as PBS), physiological saline, cell culture medium (such as DMEM), artificial cerebral spinal fluid, or the like.
  • a pharmaceutical composition or kit of the invention can contain other pharmaceuticals, in addition to the compound.
  • the other agent(s) can be administered at any suitable time during the treatment of the patient, either concurrently or sequentially.
  • compositions of the invention can be in unit dosage form.
  • unit dosage form refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for animal (e.g. human) subjects, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of an agent of the invention, alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents, calculated in an amount sufficient to produce the desired effect in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier, or vehicle.
  • One skilled in the art can easily determine the appropriate dose, schedule, and method of administration for the exact formulation of the composition being used, in order to achieve the desired effective amount or effective concentration of the agent in the individual patient.
  • the dose of a composition of the invention, administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to produce at least a detectable amount of a diagnostic or therapeutic response in the individual over a reasonable time frame.
  • the dose used to achieve a desired effect will be determined by a variety of factors, including the potency of the particular agent being administered, the pharmacodynamics associated with the agent in the host, the severity of the disease state of infected individuals, other medications being administered to the subject, etc.
  • the size of the dose also will be determined by the existence of any adverse side effects that may accompany the particular agent, or composition thereof, employed. It is generally desirable, whenever possible, to keep adverse side effects to a minimum.
  • the dose of the biologically active material will vary; suitable amounts for each particular agent will be evident to a skilled worker.
  • kits including a compound according to the invention.
  • the kit provides packaged pharmaceutical compositions having a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the invention.
  • the packaged pharmaceutical composition will include the reaction precursors necessary to generate the compound of the invention upon combination with a radionuclide.
  • Other packaged pharmaceutical compositions provided by the present invention further comprise indicia comprising at least one of: instructions for preparing compounds according to the invention from supplied precursors, instructions for using the composition to image cells or tissues expressing PSMA, or instructions for using the composition to image glutamatergic neurotransmission in a patient suffering from a stress-related disorder, or instructions for using the composition to image prostate cancer.
  • a kit according to the invention contains from about 1 mCi to about 30 mCi of the radionuclide-labeled imaging agent described above, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the imaging agent and carrier may be provided in solution or in lyophilized form.
  • the kit may optionally contain a sterile and physiologically acceptable reconstitution medium such as water, saline, buffered saline, and the like.
  • the kit may provide a compound of the invention in solution or in lyophilized form, and these components of the kit of the invention may optionally contain stabilizers such as NaCl, silicate, phosphate buffers, ascorbic acid, gentisic acid, and the like. Additional stabilization of kit components may be provided in this embodiment, for example, by providing the reducing agent in an oxidation-resistant form.
  • stabilizers such as NaCl, silicate, phosphate buffers, ascorbic acid, gentisic acid, and the like. Additional stabilization of kit components may be provided in this embodiment, for example, by providing the reducing agent in an oxidation-resistant form.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to a biocompatible solution, having due regard to sterility, p[Eta], isotonicity, stability, and the like and can include any and all solvents, diluents (including sterile saline, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, Lactated Ringer's Injection and other aqueous buffer solutions), dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic agents, and the like.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may also contain stabilizers, preservatives, antioxidants, or other additives, which are well known to one of skill in the art, or other vehicle as known in the art.
  • the presently disclosed subject matter provides a kit comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • substituted refers to the ability, as appreciated by one skilled in this art, to change one functional group for another functional group on a molecule, provided that the valency of all atoms is maintained.
  • substituent may be either the same or different at every position.
  • the substituents also may be further substituted (e.g., an aryl group substituent may have another substituent off it, such as another aryl group, which is further substituted at one or more positions).
  • substituent groups or linking groups are specified by their conventional chemical formulae, written from left to right, they equally encompass the chemically identical substituents that would result from writing the structure from right to left, e.g., —CH 2 O— is equivalent to —OCH 2 —; —C( ⁇ O)O— is equivalent to —OC( ⁇ O)—; —OC( ⁇ O)NR— is equivalent to —NRC( ⁇ O)O—, and the like.
  • R groups such as groups R 1 , R 2 , and the like, or variables, such as “m” and “n”
  • R 1 and R 2 can be substituted alkyls, or R 1 can be hydrogen and R 2 can be a substituted alkyl, and the like.
  • a when used in reference to a group of substituents herein, mean at least one.
  • a compound is substituted with “an” alkyl or aryl, the compound is optionally substituted with at least one alkyl and/or at least one aryl.
  • the group may be referred to as “R-substituted.” Where a moiety is R-substituted, the moiety is substituted with at least one R substituent and each R substituent is optionally different.
  • R or group will generally have the structure that is recognized in the art as corresponding to a group having that name, unless specified otherwise herein.
  • certain representative “R” groups as set forth above are defined below.
  • a “substituent group,” as used herein, includes a functional group selected from one or more of the following moieties, which are defined herein:
  • hydrocarbon refers to any chemical group comprising hydrogen and carbon.
  • the hydrocarbon may be substituted or unsubstituted. As would be known to one skilled in this art, all valencies must be satisfied in making any substitutions.
  • the hydrocarbon may be unsaturated, saturated, branched, unbranched, cyclic, polycyclic, or heterocyclic.
  • Illustrative hydrocarbons are further defined herein below and include, for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, allyl, vinyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, ethynyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • alkyl by itself or as part of another substituent, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight (i.e., unbranched) or branched chain, acyclic or cyclic hydrocarbon group, or combination thereof, which may be fully saturated, mono- or polyunsaturated and can include di- and multivalent groups, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., C 1 -C 10 means one to ten carbons, including 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 carbons).
  • alkyl refers to C 1-20 inclusive, including 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20 carbons, linear (i.e., “straight-chain”), branched, or cyclic, saturated or at least partially and in some embodiments fully unsaturated (i.e., alkenyl and alkynyl) hydrocarbon radicals derived from a hydrocarbon moiety containing between one and twenty carbon atoms by removal of a single hydrogen atom.
  • saturated hydrocarbon groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, sec-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, n-hexyl, sec-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-undecyl, dodecyl, cyclohexyl, (cyclohexyl)methyl, cyclopropylmethyl, and homologs and isomers thereof.
  • Branched refers to an alkyl group in which a lower alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, is attached to a linear alkyl chain.
  • Lower alkyl refers to an alkyl group having 1 to about 8 carbon atoms (i.e., a C 1-8 alkyl), e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 carbon atoms.
  • Higher alkyl refers to an alkyl group having about 10 to about 20 carbon atoms, e.g., 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl refers, in particular, to C 1-8 straight-chain alkyls. In other embodiments, “alkyl” refers, in particular, to C 1-8 branched-chain alkyls.
  • Alkyl groups can optionally be substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) with one or more alkyl group substituents, which can be the same or different.
  • alkyl group substituent includes but is not limited to alkyl, substituted alkyl, halo, arylamino, acyl, hydroxyl, aryloxyl, alkoxyl, alkylthio, arylthio, aralkyloxyl, aralkylthio, carboxyl, alkoxycarbonyl, oxo, and cycloalkyl.
  • alkyl chain There can be optionally inserted along the alkyl chain one or more oxygen, sulfur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, wherein the nitrogen substituent is hydrogen, lower alkyl (also referred to herein as “alkylaminoalkyl”), or aryl.
  • substituted alkyl includes alkyl groups, as defined herein, in which one or more atoms or functional groups of the alkyl group are replaced with another atom or functional group, including for example, alkyl, substituted alkyl, halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, alkoxyl, hydroxyl, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, and mercapto.
  • heteroalkyl by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon group, or combinations thereof, consisting of at least one carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, P, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized.
  • the heteroatom(s) O, N, P and S and Si may be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at the position at which alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—CH 3 , —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 25 —S(O)—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —S(O) 2 —CH 3 , —CH ⁇ CHO—CH 3 , —Si(CH 3 ) 3 , —CH 2 —CH ⁇ N—OCH 3 , —CH ⁇ CH—N(CH 3 )—CH 3 , O—CH 3 , —O—CH 2 —CH 3 , and —CN. Up to two or three heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH 2 —NH—OCH 3 and —CH 2 —O—Si(CH 3 ) 3 .
  • heteroalkyl groups include those groups that are attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom, such as —C(O)NR′, —NR′R′′, —OR′, —SR, —S(O)R, and/or —S(O 2 )R′.
  • heteroalkyl is recited, followed by recitations of specific heteroalkyl groups, such as —NR′R or the like, it will be understood that the terms heteroalkyl and —NR′R′′ are not redundant or mutually exclusive. Rather, the specific heteroalkyl groups are recited to add clarity. Thus, the term “heteroalkyl” should not be interpreted herein as excluding specific heteroalkyl groups, such as —NR′R′′ or the like.
  • Cyclic and “cycloalkyl” refer to a non-aromatic mono- or multicyclic ring system of about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms, e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkyl group can be optionally partially unsaturated.
  • the cycloalkyl group also can be optionally substituted with an alkyl group substituent as defined herein, oxo, and/or alkylene.
  • cyclic alkyl chain There can be optionally inserted along the cyclic alkyl chain one or more oxygen, sulfur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, wherein the nitrogen substituent is hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or substituted aryl, thus providing a heterocyclic group.
  • Representative monocyclic cycloalkyl rings include cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl.
  • Multicyclic cycloalkyl rings include adamantyl, octahydronaphthyl, decalin, camphor, camphane, and noradamantyl, and fused ring systems, such as dihydro- and tetrahydronaphthalene, and the like.
  • cycloalkylalkyl refers to a cycloalkyl group as defined hereinabove, which is attached to the parent molecular moiety through an alkyl group, also as defined above.
  • alkyl group also as defined above.
  • examples of cycloalkylalkyl groups include cyclopropylmethyl and cyclopentylethyl.
  • cycloheteroalkyl or “heterocycloalkyl” refer to a non-aromatic ring system, unsaturated or partially unsaturated ring system, such as a 3- to 10-member substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl ring system, including one or more heteroatoms, which can be the same or different, and are selected from the group consisting of nitrogen (N), oxygen (O), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), and silicon (Si), and optionally can include one or more double bonds.
  • N nitrogen
  • O oxygen
  • S sulfur
  • P phosphorus
  • Si silicon
  • the cycloheteroalkyl ring can be optionally fused to or otherwise attached to other cycloheteroalkyl rings and/or non-aromatic hydrocarbon rings.
  • Heterocyclic rings include those having from one to three heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen, in which the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized.
  • heterocylic refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring or a polycyclic group wherein at least one ring atom is a heteroatom selected from O, S, and N (wherein the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized), including, but not limited to, a bi- or tri-cyclic group, comprising fused six-membered rings having between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from the oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen, wherein (i) each 5-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, each 6-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, and each 7-membered ring has 0 to 3 double bonds, (ii) the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized, (iii) the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized, and (iv) any of the above heterocyclic rings may be fused to an aryl or heteroaryl ring.
  • Representative cycloheteroalkyl ring systems include, but are not limited to pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, piperidyl, piperazinyl, indolinyl, quinuclidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiadiazinanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkyl and “heterocycloalkyl”, by themselves or in combination with other terms, represent, unless otherwise stated, cyclic versions of “alkyl” and “heteroalkyl”, respectively. Additionally, for heterocycloalkyl, a heteroatom can occupy the position at which the heterocycle is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples of cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, 3-cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
  • heterocycloalkyl examples include, but are not limited to, 1-(1,2,5,6-tetrahydropyridyl), 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 3-morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydrothien-2-yl, tetrahydrothien-3-yl, 1-piperazinyl, 2-piperazinyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkylene and “heterocycloalkylene” refer to the divalent derivatives of cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl, respectively.
  • An unsaturated alkyl group is one having one or more double bonds or triple bonds.
  • unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers.
  • Alkyl groups that are limited to hydrocarbon groups are termed “homoalkyl.”
  • alkenyl refers to a monovalent group derived from a C 1-20 inclusive straight or branched hydrocarbon moiety having at least one carbon-carbon double bond by the removal of a single hydrogen molecule.
  • Alkenyl groups include, for example, ethenyl (i.e., vinyl), propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, pentenyl, hexenyl, octenyl, allenyl, and butadienyl.
  • cycloalkenyl refers to a cyclic hydrocarbon containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadiene, cyclohexenyl, 1,3-cyclohexadiene, cycloheptenyl, cycloheptatrienyl, and cyclooctenyl.
  • alkynyl refers to a monovalent group derived from a straight or branched C 1-20 hydrocarbon of a designed number of carbon atoms containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • alkynyl include ethynyl, 2-propynyl (propargyl), 1-propynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, and heptynyl groups, and the like.
  • alkylene by itself or a part of another substituent refers to a straight or branched bivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group derived from an alkyl group having from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group can be straight, branched or cyclic.
  • the alkylene group also can be optionally unsaturated and/or substituted with one or more “alkyl group substituents.” There can be optionally inserted along the alkylene group one or more oxygen, sulfur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms (also referred to herein as “alkylaminoalkyl”), wherein the nitrogen substituent is alkyl as previously described.
  • alkylene groups include methylene (—CH 2 —); ethylene (—CH 2 —CH 2 —); propylene (—(CH 2 ) 3 —); cyclohexylene (—C 6 H 10 —); —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ CH—; —CH ⁇ CH—CH 2 —; —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH ⁇ CHCH 2 —, —CH 2 CsCCH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH(CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 )CH 2 —, —(CH 2 ) q —N(R)—(CH 2 ) r —, wherein each of q and r is independently an integer from 0 to about 20, e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20, and R is hydrogen or lower alkyl; methylenedioxyl (—O—CH 2 —O—); and ethylenedioxyl (—O—(CH 2 —
  • An alkylene group can have about 2 to about 3 carbon atoms and can further have 6-20 carbons. Typically, an alkyl (or alkylene) group will have from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, with those groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms being some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a “lower alkyl” or “lower alkylene” is a shorter chain alkyl or alkylene group, generally having eight or fewer carbon atoms.
  • heteroalkylene by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent group derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified, but not limited by, —CH 2 —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 2 — and —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—CH 2 —.
  • heteroalkylene groups heteroatoms also can occupy either or both of the chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxo, alkylenedioxo, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like).
  • no orientation of the linking group is implied by the direction in which the formula of the linking group is written.
  • the formula —C(O)OR′— represents both —C(O)OR′— and —R′OC(O)—.
  • aryl means, unless otherwise stated, an aromatic hydrocarbon substituent that can be a single ring or multiple rings (such as from 1 to 3 rings), which are fused together or linked covalently.
  • heteroaryl refers to aryl groups (or rings) that contain from one to four heteroatoms (in each separate ring in the case of multiple rings) selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized.
  • a heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a carbon or heteroatom.
  • Non-limiting examples of aryl and heteroaryl groups include phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-biphenyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl, 4-pyrimidyl, 5-benzothiazolyl, purinyl, 2-benzimidazolyl, 5-indolyl, 1-isoquinoly
  • arylene and heteroarylene refer to the divalent forms of aryl and heteroaryl, respectively.
  • aryl when used in combination with other terms (e.g., aryloxy, arylthioxy, arylalkyl) includes both aryl and heteroaryl rings as defined above.
  • arylalkyl and heteroarylalkyl are meant to include those groups in which an aryl or heteroaryl group is attached to an alkyl group (e.g., benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl, furylmethyl, and the like) including those alkyl groups in which a carbon atom (e.g., a methylene group) has been replaced by, for example, an oxygen atom (e.g., phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(1-naphthyloxy)propyl, and the like).
  • haloaryl as used herein is meant to cover only aryls substituted with one or more halogens.
  • heteroalkyl where a heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or heteroaryl includes a specific number of members (e.g. “3 to 7 membered”), the term “member” refers to a carbon or heteroatom.
  • a ring structure for example, but not limited to a 3-carbon, a 4-carbon, a 5-carbon, a 6-carbon, a 7-carbon, and the like, aliphatic and/or aromatic cyclic compound, including a saturated ring structure, a partially saturated ring structure, and an unsaturated ring structure, comprising a substituent R group, wherein the R group can be present or absent, and when present, one or more R groups can each be substituted on one or more available carbon atoms of the ring structure.
  • the presence or absence of the R group and number of R groups is determined by the value of the variable “n,” which is an integer generally having a value ranging from 0 to the number of carbon atoms on the ring available for substitution.
  • n is an integer generally having a value ranging from 0 to the number of carbon atoms on the ring available for substitution.
  • Each R group if more than one, is substituted on an available carbon of the ring structure rather than on another R group.
  • a dashed line representing a bond in a cyclic ring structure indicates that the bond can be either present or absent in the ring. That is, a dashed line representing a bond in a cyclic ring structure indicates that the ring structure is selected from the group consisting of a saturated ring structure, a partially saturated ring structure, and an unsaturated ring structure.
  • Substituents for alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl monovalent and divalent derivative groups can be one or more of a variety of groups selected from, but not limited to: —OR′, ⁇ O, ⁇ NR′, ⁇ N—OR′, —NR′R′′, —SR′, -halogen, —SiR′R′′R′′′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO 2 R′, —C(O)NR′R′′, —OC(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR′′R′′′, —NR′′C(O)OR′,
  • R′, R′′, R′′′ and R′′′′ each may independently refer to hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl (e.g., aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens), substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups, or arylalkyl groups.
  • an “alkoxy” group is an alkyl attached to the remainder of the molecule through a divalent oxygen.
  • each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R′′, R′′′ and R′′′′ groups when more than one of these groups is present.
  • R′ and R′′ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring.
  • —NR′R′′ is meant to include, but not be limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl.
  • alkyl is meant to include groups including carbon atoms bound to groups other than hydrogen groups, such as haloalkyl (e.g., —CF 3 and —CH 2 CF 3 ) and acyl (e.g., —C(O)CH 3 , —C(O)CF 3 , —C(O)CH 2 OCH 3 , and the like).
  • haloalkyl e.g., —CF 3 and —CH 2 CF 3
  • acyl e.g., —C(O)CH 3 , —C(O)CF 3 , —C(O)CH 2 OCH 3 , and the like.
  • exemplary substituents for aryl and heteroaryl groups are varied and are selected from, for example: halogen, —OR′, —NR′R′′, —SR′, —SiR′R′′R 9′ , —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO 2 R′, —C(O)NR′R′′, —OC(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR′′R′′′, —NR′′C(O)OR′, —NR—C(NR′R′′R′′′) ⁇ NR′′′′, —NR—C(NR′R′′) ⁇ NR′′′—S(O)R′, —S(O) 2 R′, —S(O) 2 NR′R′′, —NRSO 2 R′, —CN and —NO 2 , —R′,
  • Two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally form a ring of the formula -T-C(O)—(CRR′) q —U—, wherein T and U are independently —NR—, —O—, —CRR′— or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 3.
  • two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -A-(CH 2 ) r —B—, wherein A and B are independently —CRR′—, —O—, —NR—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, —S(O) 2 NR′— or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 4.
  • One of the single bonds of the new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond.
  • two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula —(CRR′) s —X′—(C′′R′′′) d —, where s and d are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and X′ is —O—, —NR′—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O) 2 —, or —S(O) 2 NR′—.
  • the substituents R, R′, R′′ and R′′′ may be independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • acyl refers to an organic acid group wherein the —OH of the carboxyl group has been replaced with another substituent and has the general formula RC( ⁇ O)—, wherein R is an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, carbocylic, heterocyclic, or aromatic heterocyclic group as defined herein).
  • R is an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, carbocylic, heterocyclic, or aromatic heterocyclic group as defined herein).
  • acyl specifically includes arylacyl groups, such as a 2-(furan-2-yl)acetyl)- and a 2-phenylacetyl group. Specific examples of acyl groups include acetyl and benzoyl.
  • Acyl groups also are intended to include amides, —RC( ⁇ O)NR′, esters, —RC( ⁇ O)OR′, ketones, —RC( ⁇ O)R′, and aldehydes, —RC( ⁇ O)H.
  • alkoxyl or “alkoxy” are used interchangeably herein and refer to a saturated (i.e., alkyl-O—) or unsaturated (i.e., alkenyl-O— and alkynyl-O—) group attached to the parent molecular moiety through an oxygen atom, wherein the terms “alkyl,” “alkenyl,” and “alkynyl” are as previously described and can include C 1-20 inclusive, linear, branched, or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated oxo-hydrocarbon chains, including, for example, methoxyl, ethoxyl, propoxyl, isopropoxyl, n-butoxyl, sec-butoxyl, tert-butoxyl, and n-pentoxyl, neopentoxyl, n-hexoxyl, and the like.
  • alkoxyalkyl refers to an alkyl-O-alkyl ether, for example, a methoxyethyl or an ethoxymethyl group.
  • Aryloxyl refers to an aryl-O— group wherein the aryl group is as previously described, including a substituted aryl.
  • aryloxyl as used herein can refer to phenyloxyl or hexyloxyl, and alkyl, substituted alkyl, halo, or alkoxyl substituted phenyloxyl or hexyloxyl.
  • Alkyl refers to an aryl-alkyl-group wherein aryl and alkyl are as previously described, and included substituted aryl and substituted alkyl.
  • exemplary aralkyl groups include benzyl, phenylethyl, and naphthylmethyl.
  • Alkyloxyl refers to an aralkyl-O— group wherein the aralkyl group is as previously described.
  • An exemplary aralkyloxyl group is benzyloxyl, i.e., C 6 H 5 —CH 2 —O—.
  • An aralkyloxyl group can optionally be substituted.
  • Alkoxycarbonyl refers to an alkyl-O—C( ⁇ O)— group.
  • exemplary alkoxycarbonyl groups include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, butyloxycarbonyl, and tert-butyloxycarbonyl.
  • Aryloxycarbonyl refers to an aryl-O—C( ⁇ O)— group.
  • exemplary aryloxycarbonyl groups include phenoxy- and naphthoxy-carbonyl.
  • Alkoxycarbonyl refers to an aralkyl-O—C( ⁇ O)— group.
  • An exemplary aralkoxycarbonyl group is benzyloxycarbonyl.
  • Carbamoyl refers to an amide group of the formula —C( ⁇ O)NH 2 .
  • Alkylcarbamoyl refers to a R′RN—C( ⁇ O)— group wherein one of R and R′ is hydrogen and the other of R and R′ is alkyl and/or substituted alkyl as previously described.
  • Dialkylcarbamoyl refers to a R′RN—C( ⁇ O)— group wherein each of R and R′ is independently alkyl and/or substituted alkyl as previously described.
  • carbonyldioxyl refers to a carbonate group of the formula —O—C( ⁇ O)—OR.
  • acyloxyl refers to an acyl-O— group wherein acyl is as previously described.
  • amino refers to the —NH 2 group and also refers to a nitrogen containing group as is known in the art derived from ammonia by the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals by organic radicals.
  • acylamino and alkylamino refer to specific N-substituted organic radicals with acyl and alkyl substituent groups respectively.
  • aminoalkyl refers to an amino group covalently bound to an alkylene linker. More particularly, the terms alkylamino, dialkylamino, and trialkylamino as used herein refer to one, two, or three, respectively, alkyl groups, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety through a nitrogen atom.
  • alkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NHR′ wherein R′ is an alkyl group, as previously defined; whereas the term dialkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NR′R′′, wherein R′ and R′′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl groups.
  • trialkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NR′R′′R′′′, wherein R′, R′′, and R′′′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl groups. Additionally, R′, R′′, and/or R′′′ taken together may optionally be —(CH 2 ) k — where k is an integer from 2 to 6. Examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, diethylamino, diethylaminocarbonyl, methylethylamino, isopropylamino, piperidino, trimethylamino, and propylamino.
  • the amino group is —NR′R′′, wherein R′ and R′′ are typically selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • alkylthioether and thioalkoxyl refer to a saturated (i.e., alkyl-S—) or unsaturated (i.e., alkenyl-S— and alkynyl-S—) group attached to the parent molecular moiety through a sulfur atom.
  • thioalkoxyl moieties include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.
  • “Acylamino” refers to an acyl-NH— group wherein acyl is as previously described.
  • “Aroylamino” refers to an aroyl-NH— group wherein aroyl is as previously described.
  • carbonyl refers to the —C( ⁇ O)— group, and can include an aldehyde group represented by the general formula R—C( ⁇ O)H.
  • carboxyl refers to the —COOH group. Such groups also are referred to herein as a “carboxylic acid” moiety.
  • halo refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo groups. Additionally, terms such as “haloalkyl,” are meant to include monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl.
  • halo(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl is mean to include, but not be limited to, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, and the like.
  • hydroxyl refers to the —OH group.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an —OH group.
  • mercapto refers to the —SH group.
  • oxo as used herein means an oxygen atom that is double bonded to a carbon atom or to another element.
  • nitro refers to the —NO 2 group.
  • thio refers to a compound described previously herein wherein a carbon or oxygen atom is replaced by a sulfur atom.
  • thiohydroxyl or thiol refers to a group of the formula —SH.
  • sulfide refers to compound having a group of the formula —SR.
  • sulfone refers to compound having a sulfonyl group —S(O 2 )R.
  • sulfoxide refers to a compound having a sulfinyl group —S(O)R
  • ureido refers to a urea group of the formula —NH—CO—NH 2 .
  • Certain compounds of the present disclosure may possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical or chiral centers) or double bonds; the enantiomers, racemates, diastereomers, tautomers, geometric isomers, stereoisometric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)-or (S)- or, as D- or L- for amino acids, and individual isomers are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure do not include those which are known in art to be too unstable to synthesize and/or isolate.
  • the present disclosure is meant to include compounds in racemic, scalemic, and optically pure forms.
  • Optically active (R)- and (S)-, or D- and L-isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques.
  • the compounds described herein contain olefenic bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include all stereochemical forms of the structure; i.e., the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric and diastereomeric mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the disclosure.
  • tautomer refers to one of two or more structural isomers which exist in equilibrium and which are readily converted from one isomeric form to another.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds which differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures with the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by 13 C- or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this disclosure.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of atoms that constitute such compounds.
  • the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example iodine-125 ( 125 I) or astatine-211 ( 211 At). All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present disclosure, whether radioactive or not, are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may exist as salts.
  • the present disclosure includes such salts.
  • Examples of applicable salt forms include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, sulfates, methanesulfonates, nitrates, maleates, acetates, citrates, fumarates, tartrates (e.g. (+)-tartrates, ( ⁇ )-tartrates or mixtures thereof including racemic mixtures, succinates, benzoates and salts with amino acids such as glutamic acid.
  • These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in art.
  • base addition salts such as sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt.
  • acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent or by ion exchange.
  • acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like.
  • salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like.
  • Certain specific compounds of the present disclosure contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.
  • the neutral forms of the compounds may be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner.
  • the parent form of the compound differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents.
  • Certain compounds of the present disclosure can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure. Certain compounds of the present disclosure may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present disclosure and are intended to be within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the present disclosure provides compounds, which are in a prodrug form.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds described herein are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present disclosure.
  • prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present disclosure by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the present disclosure when placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
  • protecting group refers to chemical moieties that block some or all reactive moieties of a compound and prevent such moieties from participating in chemical reactions until the protective group is removed, for example, those moieties listed and described in T. W. Greene, P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd ed. John Wiley & Sons (1999). It may be advantageous, where different protecting groups are employed, that each (different) protective group be removable by a different means. Protective groups that are cleaved under totally disparate reaction conditions allow differential removal of such protecting groups. For example, protective groups can be removed by acid, base, and hydrogenolysis.
  • Groups such as trityl, dimethoxytrityl, acetal and tert-butyldimethylsilyl are acid labile and may be used to protect carboxy and hydroxy reactive moieties in the presence of amino groups protected with Cbz groups, which are removable by hydrogenolysis, and Fmoc groups, which are base labile.
  • Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may be blocked with base labile groups such as, without limitation, methyl, ethyl, and acetyl in the presence of amines blocked with acid labile groups such as tert-butyl carbamate or with carbamates that are both acid and base stable but hydrolytically removable.
  • Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may also be blocked with hydrolytically removable protective groups such as the benzyl group, while amine groups capable of hydrogen bonding with acids may be blocked with base labile groups such as Fmoc.
  • Carboxylic acid reactive moieties may be blocked with oxidatively-removable protective groups such as 2,4-dimethoxybenzyl, while co-existing amino groups may be blocked with fluoride labile silyl carbamates.
  • Allyl blocking groups are useful in the presence of acid- and base-protecting groups since the former are stable and can be subsequently removed by metal or pi-acid catalysts.
  • an allyl-blocked carboxylic acid can be deprotected with a palladium(O)— catalyzed reaction in the presence of acid labile t-butyl carbamate or base-labile acetate amine protecting groups.
  • Yet another form of protecting group is a resin to which a compound or intermediate may be attached. As long as the residue is attached to the resin, that functional group is blocked and cannot react. Once released from the resin, the functional group is available to react.
  • Typical blocking/protecting groups include, but are not limited to the following moieties:
  • a “protecting group” is a chemical substituent which can be selectively removed by readily available reagents which do not attack the regenerated functional group or other functional groups in the molecule.
  • Suitable protecting groups are known in the art and continue to be developed. Suitable protecting groups may be found, for example in Wutz et al. (“Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Fourth Edition,” Wiley-Interscience, 2007). Protecting groups for protection of the carboxyl group, as described by Wutz et al. (pages 533-643), are used in certain embodiments. In some embodiments, the protecting group is removable by treatment with acid.
  • protecting groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), tertiary butyl (t-Bu), methoxymethyl (MOM), methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), tetrahydrofuranyl (THF), benzyloxymethyl (BOM), trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), and triphenylmethyl (trityl, Tr).
  • PMB p-methoxybenzyl
  • t-Bu tertiary butyl
  • MOM methoxymethyl
  • MTM methoxyethoxymethyl
  • THF tetrahydrofuranyl
  • BOM benzyloxymethyl
  • TMS trimethylsilyl
  • TES triethylsilyl
  • TDMS t-
  • metal ion refers to elements of the periodic table that are metallic and that are positively charged as a result of having fewer electrons in the valence shell than is present for the neutral metallic element.
  • Metals that are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter include metals capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable compositions. Useful metals include, but are not limited to, Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, and Ba.
  • Useful metals include, but are not limited to, Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, and Ba.
  • the metals described above can each adopt several different oxidation states. In some instances, the most stable oxidation state is formed, but other oxidation states are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • the term “about,” when referring to a value can be meant to encompass variations of, in some embodiments, ⁇ 100% in some embodiments ⁇ 50%, in some embodiments ⁇ 20%, in some embodiments ⁇ 10%, in some embodiments ⁇ 5%, in some embodiments ⁇ 1%, in some embodiments ⁇ 0.5%, and in some embodiments ⁇ 0.1% from the specified amount, as such variations are appropriate to perform the disclosed methods or employ the disclosed compositions.
  • ACN acetonitrile
  • DCM Dichloromethane
  • DIPEA N,N-Diisopropylethylamine
  • DMF Dimethylformamide
  • HPLC High Performance Liquid Chromatography
  • HRMS High Resolution Mass Spectrometry
  • LRMS Low Resolution Mass Spectrometry
  • NCS N-Chlorosuccinimide
  • NHS N-Hydroxysuccinimide
  • NMR nuclear magnetic resonance
  • PMB p-methoxybenzyl
  • RT room temperature
  • TEA Triethylamine
  • TFA Trifluoroacetic acid
  • TSTU O—(N-Succinimidyl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate.
  • PSMA + PC3 PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3 flu cell lines were obtained from Dr. Warren Heston (Cleveland Clinic). Cells were grown to 80-90% confluence in a single passage before trypsinization and formulation in Hank's balanced salt solution (HBSS, Sigma, St. Louis, MO) for implantation into mice. Animal studies were carried out in compliance with guidelines related to the conduct of animal experiments of the Johns Hopkins Animal Care and Use Committee. For optical imaging studies and ex-vivo biodistribution, male NOD-SCID mice (JHU, in house colony) were implanted subcutaneously with 1 ⁇ 10 6 PSMA + PC3 PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3 flu cells in opposite flanks. Mice were imaged when the tumor xenografts reached 3-5 mm in diameter.
  • HBSS Hank's balanced salt solution
  • FIG. 1 shows the images at 24 hours postinjection of 1 nmol of DyLight800-3 in mouse with PSMA+ PC3 PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3 flu tumors. Both whole body and ex vivo organ imaging clearly demonstrated PSMA+ PC3 PIP tumor uptake and little uptake in PSMA ⁇ PC3 flu tumor, indicating target selectivity in vivo.
  • H-Lys(Boc)-OBu-HCl was purchased from Chem-Impex International (Wood Dale, IL).
  • the N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) ester of IRDye 800CW was purchased from LI-COR Biosciences (Lincoln, NE).
  • 1 H NMR spectra were obtained on a Bruker Avance 400 mHz Spectrometer.
  • ESI mass spectra were obtained on a Bruker Esquire 3000 plus system. Purification by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) was performed on a Varian Prostar System (Varian Medical Systems, Palo Alto, CA).
  • Trifluoroacetate salt of 2-(3- ⁇ 5-[7-(5-amino-1-carboxy-pentylcarbamoyl)-heptanoylamino]-1-carboxy-pentyl ⁇ -ureido)-pentanedioc add (YC-VIII-24).
  • YC-27 To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (0.3 mg, 0.43 ⁇ mol) in DMSO (0.1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.002 mL, 11.4 ⁇ mol), followed by the NHS ester of IRDye 800CW (0.3 mg, 0.26 ⁇ mol).
  • the crude material was purified by a silica column using methanol/methylene chloride (5:95) to afford 0.101 g (0.109 mmol, 90%) of YC-VI-53, which was dissolved in a solution of 3% anisole in TFA (1 mL). The mixture was reacted at room temperature for 10 min, then concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The crude material was purified by HPLC (Econosphere C18 10u, 250 ⁇ 10 mm, H 2 O/CH 3 CN/TFA (92/8/0.1), 4 mL/min, Compound YC-VI-54 eluting at 11 min) to afford 0.035 g (57%) of compound YC-VI-54.
  • ESI-Mass calcd for C 64 H 84 N 6 O 24 S 4 [M] + 1448.4, found 1448.7.
  • ESI-Mass calcd for C 55 H 73 BF 2 N 9 O 14 [M+H] + 1132.5,
  • ESI-Mass calcd for C 45 H 67 N 8 O 11 S [M] + 927.5, found 927.0.
  • HPLC columnumn, Econosphere C18 10 ⁇ , 250 ⁇ 10 mm; retention time, minor product at 17 min, major product at 20 min
  • ESI-Mass calcd for C 55 H 59 N 5 O 17 [M] + 1061.4, found 1061.6 (for both minor and major product).
  • Fluorescence spectra were recorded using a Varian Cary Eclipse fluorescence spectrophotometer (Varian Medical Systems) with excitation from a Xenon are lamp.
  • YC-27 was dissolved in water. All of the fluorescence measurements were performed in aqueous solution under ambient conditions.
  • the fluorescence intensity data were collected in the spectral region 780-900 nm over which quantum yield was integrated.
  • Time-resolved intensity decays were recorded using a PicoQuant Fluotime 100 time-correlated single-photon counting (TCSPC) fluorescence lifetime spectrometer (PicoQuant, Berlin, DE).
  • TCSPC time-correlated single-photon counting
  • the excitation was obtained using a pulsed laser diode (PicoQuant PDL800-B) with a 20 MHz repetition rate.
  • the fluorescence intensity decay of YC-27 was analyzed in terms of the single-exponential decay using the PicoQuant Fluofit 4.1 software with deconvolution of the instrument response function and nonlinear least squares fitting. The goodness-of-fit was determined by the ⁇ 2 value.
  • YC-27 The electronic spectrum of YC-27 exhibited an absorbance maximum at 774 nm with an extinction coefficient of 158,900 M ⁇ 1 .
  • YC-27 Upon excitation, YC-27 provided intense fluorescence with an emission maximum at 792 nm and a fluorescence lifetime of 443 psec in aqueous solution ( FIG. 3 ).
  • YC-27 Using an excitation wavelength of 775 nm, YC-27 demonstrated a fluorescence quantum yield of 0.053 in aqueous solution relative to ICG, which demonstrated a quantum yield of 0.016 ( FIG. 2 ) (Sevick-Muraca et al., Photochem. Photobiol., vol. 66, pp.
  • ICG has been used previously for intraoperative tumor mapping (K. Gotoh, T. Yamada, O. Ishikawa, H. Takahashi, H. Eguchi, M. Yano, H. Ohigashi, Y. Tomita, Y. Miyamoto, and S. Imaoka, A novel image-guided surgery of hepatocellular carcinoma by indocyanine green fluorescence imaging navigation. J. Surg. Oncol., 2009).
  • PSMA inhibitory activity of YC-27 was determined using a fluorescence-based assay according to a previously reported procedure (Chen et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 7933-7943, 2008). Briefly, lysates of LNCaP cell extracts (25 ⁇ L) were incubated with the inhibitor (12.5 ⁇ L) in the presence of 4 ⁇ M N-acetylaspartylglutamate (NAAG) (12.5 ⁇ L) for 120 min. The amount of glutamate released by NAAG hydrolysis was measured by incubation with a working solution (50 ⁇ L) of the Amplex Red Glutamic Acid Kit (Molecular Probes Inc., Eugene, OR) for 60 min.
  • NAAG N-acetylaspartylglutamate
  • the K i value of YC-27 was 0.37 nM with 95% confidence intervals from 0.18 nM to 0.79 nM.
  • the K i value of the known PSMA inhibitor ZJ-43 Zhou et al., Nat. Rev. Drug Discov., vol. 4, pp. 1015-1026, 2005
  • the inhibition curve of YC-27 which is expressed with respect to the amount of glutamate released from hydrolysis of NAAG, is shown in FIG. 4 .
  • PSMA-expressing (PSMA+ PC3-PIP) and non-expressing (PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu) prostate cancer cell lines were grown in RPMI 1640 medium (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA) containing 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) (Invitrogen) and 1% Pen-Strep (Biofluids, Camarillo, CA). All cell cultures were maintained in 5% carbon dioxide (CO 2 ), at 37.0° C. in a humidified incubator. Animal studies were undertaken in compliance with the regulations of the Johns Hopkins Animal Care and Use Committee.
  • mice Six- to eight-week-old male, non-obese diabetic (NOD)/severe-combined immunodeficient (SCID) mice (Charles River Laboratories, Wilmington, MA) were implanted subcutaneously (s.c.) with PC3-PIP and PC3-flu cells (2 ⁇ 10 6 in 100 ⁇ L of Matrigel) at the forward left and right flanks, respectively. Mice were imaged or used in ex vivo biodistribution assays when the xenografts reached 5 to 7 mm in diameter.
  • NOD non-obese diabetic
  • SCID severe-combined immunodeficient mice
  • Mouse #1 was injected with 10 nmol and mouse #2 with 1 nmol of YC-27 in 200 ⁇ L of PBS intravenously (i.v.) via the lateral tail vein.
  • Mouse #3 was injected with 1 nmol of YC-27 and also co-injected with 1 ⁇ mol of the known PSMA inhibitor 2- ⁇ 3-[1-carboxy-5-(4-iodo-benzoylamino)-pentyl]-ureido ⁇ -pentanedioic acid (DCIBzL) (Chen et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp.
  • the scan time was less than 30 sec to complete white light, 700 nm channel and 800 nm channel image acquisition. Images are displayed using a pseudocolor output with corresponding scale. All images were acquired at the same parameter settings and are scaled to the same maximum values. Imaging bed temperature was adjusted to 37° C. Animals received inhalational anesthesia (isoflurane) through a nose cone attached to the imaging bed. Animals were sacrificed by cervical dislocation for ex vivo imaging studies at the end of acquisition of the in vivo images.
  • Ex vivo images were acquired first by midline surgical laparotomy and then again by harvesting liver, spleen, stomach, small intestine, kidneys, urinary bladder, PC3-PIP and PC3-flu tumors and displaying them individually on plastic Petri dishes. Estimates of signal output were provided by drawing three circular regions of interest within each tumor and determining the average signal (arbitrary units)/area using the manufacturer's software.
  • FIG. 5 A - FIG. 5 O depict the pharmacokinetic behavior of YC-27 in vivo.
  • 10 nmol of YC-27 was administered intravenously and the animal was imaged repeatedly over a three day period.
  • the control (PSMA-negative) PC3-flu tumor at 18.5 h p.i. through 70.5 h p.i. ( FIG. 5 C through FIG. 5 M ).
  • FIG. 6 A - FIG. 6 T The experiment in FIG. 6 A - FIG. 6 T was performed with 10-fold less YC-27 administered than in the previous experiment. Despite reducing the concentration of YC-27, PSMA+ PC3-PIP tumor could be seen clearly at one day p.i. ( FIG. 6 A - FIG. 6 J , mouse #2, Left Panels). DCIBzL, a known, high-affinity PSMA inhibitor, was co-administered with YC-27 as a test of binding specificity ( FIG. 6 K - FIG. 6 T , mouse #3, Right Panels). Nearly all of the light emission from target tumor, as well as kidneys, was blocked, demonstrating the specificity of this compound for PSMA in vivo.
  • the estimated target-to-nontarget ratio (PC-3 PIP vs. PC-3 flu light output) was 26 when comparing the tumors from panel F (20.5 h p.i.).
  • 1 nmol converts to 1.6 ⁇ g injected.
  • 18 F or other radionuclide at 1,000 mCi/ ⁇ mol (37 GBq/ ⁇ mol)
  • a standard dose of 200 ⁇ Ci (7.4 MBq) to a mouse, we would be injecting 0.3 ⁇ g.
  • PSMA-based imaging agents have been synthesized, including those using the urea scaffold (Banerjee et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008; Chen et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 7933-7943, 2008; Zhou et al., Nat. Rev. Drug Discov., vol. 4, pp. 1015-1026, 2005; Pomper et al., Mol. Imaging, vol. 1, pp. 96-101, 2002; Foss et al., Clin. Cancer Res., vol. 11, pp. 4022-4028, 2005; Humblet et al., Mol.
  • FIG. 7 shows fluorescence of cells expressing PSMA (green fluorescence, top left).
  • PIP and FLU cells were treated with both YC-VIII-36 and PSMA inhibitor PMPA (5 ⁇ M), showing inhibition of cellular fluorescence by PMPA ( FIG. 7 , bottom).
  • FIG. 8 shows PC3-PIP cells treated with DAPI (blue) and varying concentrations of YC-VIII-36 (green).
  • FIG. 9 shows time dependent internalization of YC-VIII-36 into PC3-PIP cells treated with YC-VIII-36 (green) and DAPI (blue).
  • the time dependent internalization study was done as described (Liu et al., Prostate vol. 68, pp. 955-964, 2008) with appropriate modifications. Briefly, PC3-PIP cells were seeded as above. The cells were first pre-chilled by incubating with ice cold complete growth media and then incubated with ice cold complete growth media containing 500 nM of compound YC-VIII-36 at 40 C for 1 hr.
  • FIG. 10 shows titration and detection of varying amounts of YC-VIII-36 injected subcutaneously into a nude mouse. (IVIS spectrum with 10 second exposure followed by spectral unmixing).
  • FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 show fluorescence images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36.
  • Compound YC-VIII-36 (150 ⁇ g) was injected into the tail vein of a nude mouse. The excitation frequency was 465 nm with a 5 s exposure. Fluorescence emission was measured at 500, 520, 540, and 580 nm, followed by spectral unmixing.
  • FIG. 12 (bottom) show the biodistribution of compound YC-VII-36 (150 ⁇ g) 180 minutes after injection.
  • FCA Flow cytometric analysis
  • FCA was performed using a FACS Calibur flow cytometer (Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA). For data acquisition, singlets were gated as the prominent cluster of cells identified from a plot of side scatter (SSC) width versus forward scatter (FSC) width to ensure that cell aggregates were excluded from analysis. 50,000 total events were counted to estimate the positively stained cells from a plot of Fl-1 (X-axis) versus Fl-2 (Y-axis). All data were analyzed using CellQuest version 3.3 software.
  • PC3-PIP cells were labeled with 1 mM of compound YC-VIII-36 for 30 min at 37° C. in the humidified incubator with 5% CO 2 . Cells were washed twice with ice cold KRB buffer and stored on ice. Flow sorting was performed using FACS Aria system (Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA) within 10-15 minutes after completion of last wash. Both the stained (positive) and also the unstained (negative) subpopulations were collected in sterile tubes containing 3 ml of complete growth media. Following sorting, cells were centrifuged, resuspended in warm complete growth media, transferred to tissue culture flasks and incubated at 37° C.
  • PC3-flu, PC3-PIP, and LNCaP cells were treated with compound YC-VIII-36, and analyzed using fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) to determine the percentage of cells expressing PSMA on the cell surface.
  • FIG. 13 shows FACS analysis showing the percent subpopulation of PSMA positive cells in PC3-flu, PC3-PIP, and LNCaP cells.
  • PC3-flu (PSMA ⁇ ) cells show a very small percentage
  • PC3-PIP (PSMA+, center) and LNCaP (PSMA+ right) show greater percentages.
  • PC3-PIP (PSMA+) cells were sorted using FACS following treatment with compound YC-VIII-36.
  • FIG. 14 shows cell sorting of PC3-PIP cells, including initial percentage (top center), and after 3 passages of sorting (bottom). Region R 2 indicates positive PSMA surface expression, as indicated by binding compound YC-VIII-36. The results show an increase in the percentage of PSMA expressing cells following three rounds of cell sorting.
  • PIP-pos cells were mixed with 10 million of PC3-flu cells in triplicates in different ratios—1 in 10 6 , 10 5 , 10 4 , 10 3 and 10 2 respectively. All the tubes containing cell suspensions in complete growth media including controls [10 million PC3-flu cells with 0% PIP-pos cells and 10 million PIP-pos cells (100%)] were incubated with 100 nM of compound #YC-VIII-36 at 37° C. in the humidified incubator with 5% CO 2 as above, with occasional stirring. The cells were washed, fixed with 2% paraformaldehyde as above and analyzed with LSRII (Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA) for the determination of detection limit.
  • LSRII Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA
  • compound SRV32 2- ⁇ 3-[5-(7- ⁇ 5-[4-(2-Amino-2-carboxy-ethyl)-[1,2,3]triazol-1-yl]-1-carboxy-pentylcarbamoyl ⁇ -heptanoylamino)-1-carboxy-pentyl]-ureido ⁇ -pentanedioic acid, compound SRV32.
  • the compound SRV32 was prepared in three steps following the scheme shown below.
  • the compound 1 was prepared from literature method (Banerjee et al., J Med Chem, vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). To a solution of compound 1 (100 mg, 0.107 mmol in 5 ml DMF) was added H-Lys( ⁇ -azide)-OH (20 mg, 0.107 mmol) (Boc-Lys(Azide)-OH was purchased from Anaspec. The removal of Boc group was done by treating the commercial compound with 1:1 TFA:CH 2 Cl 2 at room temperature for 4 hr, and the solution was stirred for 16 h at rt. The solvent was removed under vacuum.
  • Radiolabeling with Tc-99m was performed by the same procedure described previously (Banerjee et al, J Med Chem, vol. 51. pp. 4504-4517, 2008).
  • a single SCID mouse implanted with both a PC-3 PIP (PSMA+) and a PC-3 flu (PSMA ⁇ ) xenograft was injected intravenously with compound 99m Tc-SRV32 in saline.
  • the mouse was anesthetized with isoflurane and maintained under 1% isoflurane in oxygen.
  • the mouse was positioned on the X-SPECT (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) gantry and was scanned using two low energy, high-resolution pinhole collimators (Gamma Medica) rotating through 360° in 6° increments for 45 seconds per increment. All gamma images were reconstructed using Lunagem software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA).
  • mice were then scanned by CT (X-SPECT) over a 4.6 cm field-of-view using a 600 ⁇ A, 50 kV beam.
  • the SPECT and CT data were then coregistered using the supplier's software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) and displayed using AMIDE (http://amide.sourceforge.net/). Data were reconstructed using the Ordered Subsets-Expectation Maximization (OS-EM) algorithm.
  • OS-EM Ordered Subsets-Expectation Maximization
  • a single SCID mouse implanted with a PSMA+ LnCaP xenograft was injected intravenously with compound 99m Tc-SRV32 in saline.
  • the mouse was anesthetized with isoflurane and maintained under 1% isoflurane in oxygen.
  • the mouse was positioned on the X-SPECT (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) gantry and was scanned using two low energy, high-resolution pinhole collimators (Gamma Medica) rotating through 360° in 6° increments for 45 seconds per increment. All gamma images were reconstructed using Lunagem software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA).
  • mice were scanned by CT (X-SPECT) over a 4.6 cm field-of-view using a 600 ⁇ A, 50 kV beam.
  • the SPECT and CT data were then coregistered using the supplier's software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) and displayed using AMIDE (http://amide.sourceforge.net/). Data were reconstructed using the Ordered Subsets-Expectation Maximization (OS-EM) algorithm. Images are shown in FIG. 16 .
  • HPLC High-performance liquid chromatography
  • the column was filled with 150 ⁇ L of a 2.4/97.6 0.05N HCl/acetone solution. About 2 min standing appeared to be best for complete desorption of the Ga(III) from the resin into the liquid phase. An additional 250 ⁇ L of this mixture were applied, and the purified 68 Ga(III) was obtained in 400 ⁇ L of this eluent overall. 4. The fraction (400 ⁇ L eluent) was used directly for the labeling of DOTA-urea compound. The processed activity was added to 500 ⁇ L pure H 2 O in a standard glass reagent vial containing 100 ⁇ l (92 nmol, 1 mg/mL solution) of ligand. No buffer solution was added. The reaction vial was heated at 95° C. for 10 min.
  • PC-3 PIP (PSMA+) and PC-3 flu (PSMA ⁇ ) cell lines were obtained from Dr. Warren Heston (Cleveland Clinic) and were maintained as previously described (Mease et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 14, pp. 3036-3043, 2008).
  • LNCaP cells were obtained from American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, VA) and were maintained as per ATCC guidelines. All cells were grown to 80-90% confluence before trypsinization and formulation in Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS, Sigma, St. Louis, MO) for implantation into mice.
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • HBSS Hank's Balanced Salt Solution
  • Compound 1 was prepared according to a literature method (Banerjee et al., J Med Chem, vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). To a solution of compound 1 (100 mg, 0.11 mmol in 5 ml, DMF) was added H-Lys(Boc)-OBz (36 mg, 0.11 mmol) (Hamachi et al., Chem. Eur. J., vol. 5, pp. 1503-1511, 1999). The solution was stirred for 16 h at ambient temperature. The solvent was removed under vacuum. The solid residue thus obtained was dissolved in 10 mL ethyl acetate and extracted with 3 ⁇ 10 mL water.
  • 13C (CD 3 CO 2 D) d: 177.5, 177.6, 175.3, 172.3, 160.6, 160.2, 159.8, 159.5, 135.5, 128.5, 128.4, 119.9, 117, 114.0, 111.3, 67.3, 55.5, 53.1, 51.0, 49.9, 30.7, 28.0, 26.4, 25.1.
  • Fmoc-Lys(Boc)-Wang resin 100 mg, 0.43 mM was allowed to swell with CH 2 Cl 2 (3 mL) followed by DMF (3 mL). A solution of 20% piperidine in DMF (3 ⁇ 3 mL) was added to the resin that was then shaken gently on a mechanical shaker for 30 min at ambient temperature. The resin was washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 3 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (3 ⁇ 3 mL). Formation of free amine was assessed by the Kaiser test (Kaiser et al., Anal Biochem, vol. 34, pp. 595-598, 1970).
  • the concentrated product was purified by using a C 18 SepPak Vac 2 g column. The product was eluted with a solution 70/30 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each). ESIMS: 827 [M+1] + . Lyophilized amine (10 mg, 12 ⁇ mol in 2 mL DMF) was added to 1 (prepared separately) (20 mg, 21.4 ⁇ mol in 1 mL DMF) followed by TEA (214 ⁇ mol, 30 ⁇ L) and then stirred at 25° C. for 16 h. After solvent removal, solid residue was treated with 3 mL TFA:CH 2 Cl 2 to remove the PMB group. The residue was washed 2 ⁇ 5 mL CH 2 Cl 2 to remove impurities.
  • 13C (CD 3 CO 2 D) ⁇ : 176.5, 177, 177.06, 177.6, 173.6, 173.24, 161.3, 160.92, 160.53, 160.14, 159.77, 137.95, 137.06, 130.5, 129.5, 127.9, 127.71, 120.8, 118.0, 115.1, 112.3, 56.1, 55.5, 53.5, 53.3, 40.1, 38.8, 36.832.6, 31.8, 30.7, 29.42, 27.9, 26.53.
  • PBS phosphate buffered saline
  • SRV100 and the corresponding gallium compound were more lipophilic than SRV27 and its gallium-labeled analog, which is reasonable in light of the presence of two phenylalanine residues in the long linker of SRV100, while SRV27 has only one lysine residue protected as the benzyl ester.
  • Ki values for SRV27, [ 69,71 Ga]SRV27, SRV100 and [ 69, 71 Ga]SRV100 were determined using a competitive N-acetyl aspartyl glutamate (NAAG) fluorescence cell binding assay adapted from the literature (Kozikowski et al., J Med Chem, vol. 47, pp. 1729-1738, 2004). All compounds were found to be strong inhibitors of PSMA. Compounds SRV27 and [ 69, 71 Ga]SRV27 had inhibitory capacities of 2.9 nM and 29 nM, respectively. For SRV100 and [ 69, 71 Ga]SRV100, values were 1.23 nM and 0.44 nM, respectively.
  • PSMA+ PC-3 PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC-3 flu xenograft-bearing SCID mice were injected via the tail vein with 30 ⁇ Ci (1.1 MBq) of [ 68 Ga]SRV27 or [ 68 Ga]SRV100.
  • 30 ⁇ Ci 1.1 MBq
  • each four mice were sacrificed by cervical dislocation at 30, 60, 120, 180 min p.i.
  • the heart, lungs, liver, stomach, pancreas, spleen, fat, kidney, muscle, small and large intestines, urinary bladder, and PC-3 PIP and flu tumors were quickly removed. A 0.1 mL sample of blood was also collected.
  • % ID/g was calculated by comparison with samples of a standard dilution of the initial dose. All measurements were corrected for decay.
  • Compound [ 68 Ga]SRV27 was assessed for its pharmacokinetics ex vivo in severe-combined immunodeficient (SCID) mice bearing both PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC3-flu xenografts (Chang et al., Cancer Res. vol. 59, pp. 3192-3198, 1999).
  • Table 1 shows the percent injected dose per gram (% ID/g) of radiotracer in selected organs for [ 68 Ga]SR V27.
  • Compound [ 68 Ga]SRV100 was also investigated for its pharmacokinetic characteristics in tumor bearing mice at 5 min, 1 h, 2 h and 3 h p.i.
  • Table 2 shows the % ID/g of radiotracer in selected organs for [ 68 Ga]SRV100.
  • [ 68 Ga]SRV100 showed PSMA-dependent tumor uptake. After a peak, flow-related, uptake at 5 min p.i. of 6.61 ⁇ 0.55%, [ 68 Ga]SRV100 demonstrated a 2 h tumor uptake value of 3.29 ⁇ 0.77%, which dropped to 1.80 ⁇ 0.16% at 3 h. Uptake in blood was high at 5 min and rapidly washed out within 1 h. Non-target organs such as kidney, spleen and lung showed high uptake at 5 min and rapidly washed out with time. With the exception of the kidneys and spleen, clearance from blood and normal organs was faster for [ 68 Ga]SRV100 than for [ 68 Ga]SRV27.
  • a single SCID mouse implanted with a PSMA+ LNCaP xenograft was injected intravenously with 0.2 mCi (7.4 MBq) of [ 68 Ga]SRV27 in 200 ⁇ L 0.9% NaCl.
  • the mouse was anesthetized with 3% isoflurane in oxygen for induction and maintained under 1.5% isoflurane in oxygen at a flow rate of 0.8 L/min.
  • the mouse was positioned in the prone position on the gantry of a GE eXplore VISTA small animal PET scanner (GE Healthcare, Milwaukee, WI).
  • Image acquisition was performed using the following protocol: The images were acquired as a pseudodynamic scan, i.e., a sequence of successive whole-body images were acquired in three bed positions for a total of 120 min. The dwell time at each position was 5 min, such that a given bed position (or mouse organ) was revisited every 15 min. An energy window of 250-700 keV was used. Images were reconstructed using the FORE/2D-OSEM method (two iterations, 16 subsets) and included correction for radioactive decay, scanner dead time, and scattered radiation.
  • the mobile mouse holder was placed on the gantry of an X-SPECT (Gamma Medica Ideas. Northridge, CA) small animal imaging device to acquire the corresponding CT. Animals were scanned over a 4.6 cm field-of-view using a 600 ⁇ A, 50 kV beam. The PET and CT data were then co-registered using Amira 5.2.0 software (Visage Imaging Inc., Carlsbad, CA).
  • FIGS. 17 and 18 demonstrate the high target selectivity of [ 68 Ga] SRV27 and [ 68 Ga]SRV100 by delineating the PSMA+ tumors.
  • a PSMA ⁇ control tumor was not included in FIG. 17
  • a separate blocking study was performed for [Ga]SRV27, in which an animal pre-treated with 50 mg/kg of the known PSMA-binding ligand, 2-(phosphonomethyl)pentanedioic acid (2-PMPA) (Jackson et al., J Med Chem, vol. 39. pp. 619-622, 1996), did not demonstrate PSMA+ tumor uptake, attesting to the binding specificity of this compound.
  • 2-PMPA 2-(phosphonomethyl)pentanedioic acid
  • PIP tumors contain about one order of magnitude lower PSMA than LNCaP tumors (data not shown), which are often employed to assess for binding specificity of PSMA-targeting agents.
  • PIP/flu is the preferred comparison as both are derived from PC-3 cells, providing a more controlled study.
  • PET computed tomography
  • Gallium-68 provides a link between PET and single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT) since metal chelating methodology needed for 99m Tc can also be applied to 68 Ga.
  • PET single photon emission computed tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computed tomography
  • a further analogy is the convenience of use of a 68 Ge/ 68 Ga generator (PET), as with 99 Mo 99m Tc (SPECT), to provide readily available isotope, with no need for an in-house cyclotron.
  • Compound SRV27 and SRV100 were prepared as described in Example 5.
  • In-111 labeling was generally performed by treatment of SRV27 or SRV100 or SRV73 with 111 InCl 3 , in 200 mM aqueous NaOAc ⁇ 60° C. for 30 minutes.
  • 60 ⁇ l of SRV27 (2 mg/mL, sodium acetate) was combined with 100 ⁇ l sodium acetate and 3 mCi 111 InCl 3 in a 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube and left at for 60° C. for 30 min.
  • the radiolabeled product was diluted with 800 ⁇ l water and purified by HPLC. Radiolabeling yield is 1.7 mCi ( ⁇ 57%) and radiochemical purity was >99.9%
  • Compound SRV73 was prepared by the method outlined in the scheme below.
  • Compound SRV73 is a bimodal compound having a fluorescent dye moiety and a metal chelating moiety
  • SPECT-CT imaging experiment of compound [ 111 In]SRV27 illustrated clear PSMA-dependent binding in PSMA+ PC3 PIP xenografts within 1 h post injection.
  • the high values noted in kidney are partially due to high expression of PSMA within proximal renal tubules (Silver et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 3, pp. 81-85, 197; Slusher et al., J Comp Neurol, vol. 315, pp. 271-229, 1992). Rapid clearance from the kidneys was observed while the activity retained in PSMA+ tumor even after four days post injection.
  • FIG. 22 demonstrates clear tumor uptake for [ 111 In]SRV73 at 7 h post injection. This is significant since after attaching a bulky fluorescent dye, rhodamine, the compound retains its PSMA binding activity. This is an example of dual modality application for this class of compounds.
  • SRVI34 2- ⁇ 3-[1-Carboxy-5-(7- ⁇ 5-carboxy-5-[3-phenyl-2-(3-phenyl-2- ⁇ 2-[2-(2-tritylsulfanyl-acetylamino)-acetylamino]-acetylamino ⁇ -propionylamino)-propionylamino]-pentylcarbamoyl ⁇ -heptanoylamino)-pentyl]-ureido ⁇ -pentanedioic acid (SRVI34). SRVI34 was prepared according to the scheme below.
  • Lys(Boc)-Wang resin 100 mg, 0.43 mM was allowed to swell with CH 2 Cl 2 (3 mL) followed by DMF (3 mL). A solution of 20% piperidine in DMF (3 ⁇ 3 mL) was added to the resin that was then shaken gently on a mechanical shaker for 30 min at ambient temperature. The resin was washed with DMF (3 ⁇ 3 mL) and CH 2 Cl 2 (3 ⁇ 3 mL). Formation of free amine was assessed by the Kaiser test.
  • Radiolabeling with Tc-99m Radiolabeling was performed following a literature procedure (Wang et al., Nature Protocols, vol. 1, pp. 1477-1480, 2006). Briefly, 1 mg (75.3 ⁇ mol) of compound SRVI34 was dissolved in 1 ml of 0.5 M ammonium acetate buffer at pH 8. Disodium tartarate dihydrate was dissolved in the labelling buffer of 0.5 M ammonium acetate (pH 8) to a concentration of 50 mg/ml. Ascorbic acid-HCl solution was prepared by dissolving ascorbic acid in 10 mM HCl to a concentration of 1.0 mg/ml.
  • a solution of SRVI34 (80 ⁇ l) was combined to a solution of 45 ⁇ l 0.25 M ammonium acetate, 15 ⁇ l tartarate buffer, followed by 5 ⁇ l of the freshly prepared 4 mg/ml SnCl 2 ⁇ 2H 2 O solution in the ascorbate-HCl solution.
  • the final pH will be about 8-8.5.
  • Reaction mixture was cooled, diluted 850 ⁇ l of water and purified by HPLC using a Phenomenex C 18 Luna 10 ⁇ 250 mm 2 column on a Waters 600E Delta LC system with a Waters 486 tunable absorbance UV/Vis detector, both controlled by Empower software.
  • SRVI34A and SRVI32B are diastereomers, syn and anti-isomers with respect to the Tc ⁇ O group.
  • Each product was neutralized with 50 ⁇ l of 1 M sodium bicarbonate and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The obtained solid residues was dissolved in 200 ⁇ l saline and used for imaging and biodistribution studies.
  • PSMA+ PC-3 PIP and PSMA ⁇ PC-3 flu xenograft-bearing SCID mice were injected via the tail vein with 30 ⁇ Ci [ 99m Tc]SRV134B.
  • the heart, lungs, liver, stomach, pancreas, spleen, fat, kidney, muscle, small and large intestines, urinary bladder, and PC-3 PIP and flu tumors were quickly removed.
  • a 0.1 mL sample of blood was also collected. Each organ was weighed, and the tissue radioactivity was measured with an automated gamma counter (1282 Compugamma CS, Pharmacia/LKB Nuclear, Inc., Gaithersburg, MD).
  • the % ID/g was calculated by comparison with samples of a standard dilution of the initial dose. All measurements were corrected for decay.
  • FIGS. 23 , 24 , 25 , and 26 demonstrate the high target selectivity of [ 99m Tc]SRVI34B by delineating the PSMA+ tumors.
  • the compound [ 99m Tc]SRV134B exhibited high uptake in PSMA+ tumor and no uptake in PSMA ⁇ tumor.
  • the tumor uptake remains high 4.88% ID/g even at 5 hr post inject (p.i.).
  • this compound showed very high kidney uptake 116% ID/g even at 5 hr p.i.
  • this compound showed high spleen uptake 24.5% ID/g at 5 hr p.i.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Antibodies Or Antigens For Use As Internal Diagnostic Agents (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)

Abstract

Compositions and methods for visualizing tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation, including compounds comprising near-infrared, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes and prostate specific membrane antigen ligands are disclosed.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/718,812, filed Apr. 12, 2022, now allowed, which a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/474,497, filed Sep. 14, 2021, now abandoned, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/331,113, filed May 26, 2021, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/704,137, filed Dec. 5, 2019, now abandoned, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/618,788, filed Jun. 9, 2017, now abandoned, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/324,097, filed Apr. 18, 2016, and is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/243,535, filed Apr. 2, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,776,977 issued Oct. 3, 2017, which is a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/257,499 filed Sep. 19, 2011, and now U.S. Pat. No. 9,056,841 issued Jun. 16, 2015, which is a 35 U.S.C. § 371 National Stage Entry of International Application No. PCT/US2010/028020 having an international filing date of Mar. 19, 2010, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/248,934 filed Oct. 6, 2009, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/248,067 filed Oct. 2, 2009, U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/161,484 filed Mar. 19, 2009, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/161,485 filed Mar. 19, 2009, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
    • STATEMENT OF GOVERNMENTAL INTEREST
  • This invention was made with government support under CA092871 awarded by the National Institutes of Health. The government has certain rights in the invention.
    • BACKGROUND
  • Prostate cancer (PCa) is the most commonly diagnosed malignancy and the second leading cause of cancer-related death in men in the United States. Prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) is a marker for androgen-independent disease that also is expressed on solid (nonprostate) tumor neovasculature. Complete detection and eradication of primary tumor and metastatic foci are required to effect a cure in patients with cancer.
    • SUMMARY
  • In some aspects, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a compound having the structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00001
      • wherein:
      • Z is tetrazole or CO2Q;
      • each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group;
      • a is 1,2,3, or 4;
      • R is each independently H or C1-C4 alkyl;
      • Ch is a metal chelating moiety optionally including a chelated metal, wherein Ch optionally includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound;
      • W is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, NRC(S)NR—, —NRC(O)O—, —OC(O)NR—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)NR—, or —C(O)O—;
      • Y is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, —OC(O);
      • V is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, or —OC(O)—;
      • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
      • n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
      • p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R1 may be the same or different;
      • R1 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl;
      • R2 and R3 are independently H, CO2H, or CO2R4, wherein R4 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl, wherein when one of R2 and R3 is CO2H or CO2R4, the other is H, and when p is 0, one of R2 and R3 is CO2R4, and the other is H; and
      • pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • In some aspects, the compound of formula (I) has the structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00002
  • In some aspects of the compound of formula (I), Z is CO2Q; each Q is hydrogen; R is H; a is 4; m is 6; n is 3; p is 2; R1 is C2-C12 aryl, wherein the aryl may be substituted or unsubstituted and R1 may be the same or different; R2 is CO2H; R3 is H; W is —NRC(O)—, wherein R is H; V is —C(O)—; and Ch includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound.
  • In certain aspects, R1 is phenyl or a substituted phenyl. In particular aspects, R1 is a phenyl substituted at 1, 2, 3, or 4 positions with a substituent group selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, hydroxyl, nitro, azido, amino, alkanoyl, carboxamido, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, aminoalkyl, carbocyclic aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkoxy, and a saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic heterocyclic group, which may be further substituted. In more particular aspects, R1 is a phenyl substituted with a halogen and a hydroxyl.
  • In some aspects, the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, aryl, combination of alkyl and aryl, or alkyl and aryl groups having heteroatoms. In certain aspects, the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, wherein the alkyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • In some aspects, Ch comprises a structure selected from the group consisting of:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00003
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00004
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00005
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00006
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00007
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00008
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00009
  • In particular aspects, Ch comprises 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA).
  • In some aspects, the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00010
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00011
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00012
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00013
  • In some aspects, Ch includes a chelated metal and the chelated metal comprises a radioactive isotope. In certain aspects, the radioactive isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-86, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-64, Cu-67, Co-55, Co-57, Sc-47, Ac-225, Bi-213, Bi-212, Pb-212, Sm-153, Ho-166, or Dy-166. In particular aspects, the radioactive isotope is Ga-68 or Lu-177.
  • In other aspects, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for imaging one or more prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) tumors, or cells the method comprising contacting the one or more tumors, or cells, with an effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and making an image.
  • In some aspects, the imaging comprises positron emission tomography (PET).
  • In some aspects, the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells is selected from the group consisting of a prostate tumor or cell, a metastasized prostate tumor or cell, a lung tumor or cell, a renal tumor or cell, a glioblastoma, a pancreatic tumor or cell, a bladder tumor or cell, a sarcoma, a melanoma, a breast tumor or cell, a colon tumor or cell, a germ cell, a pheochromocytoma, an esophageal tumor or cell, a stomach tumor or cell, and combinations thereof.
  • In other aspects, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for treating a tumor comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound includes a therapeutically effective radioisotope.
  • In other aspects, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a kit comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Certain aspects of the presently disclosed subject matter having been stated hereinabove, which are addressed in whole or in part by the presently disclosed subject matter, other aspects will become evident as the description proceeds when taken in connection with the accompanying Examples and Figures as best described herein below.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • The patent or application file contains at least one drawing executed in color. Copies of this patent or patent application publication with color drawings will be provided by the Office upon request and payment of the necessary fee.
  • Having thus described the presently disclosed subject matter in general terms, reference will now be made to the accompanying Figures, which are not necessarily drawn to scale, and wherein:
  • FIG. 1 shows whole body and ex vivo organ imaging of mouse with PSMA+ PC3 PIP tumor and PSMA− PC3 flu tumor at 24 h postinjection of 1 nmol of DyLight800-3;
  • FIG. 2 shows the absorbance and emission spectra, and quantum yield of exemplary compound YC-27;
  • FIG. 3 shows the fluorescence decay of exemplary compound YC-27;
  • FIG. 4 shows an IC50 curve of compound YC-27 using a fluorescence-based NAALADase assay;
  • FIG. 5A-FIG. 5O show in vivo imaging of a NOD/SCID mouse (mouse #1), bearing PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumors. Mouse #1 received 10 nmol of YC-27 and dorsal (animal prone) and ventral (animal supine) views were obtained. Dorsal and ventral views at 40 min p.i. (FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, respectively); 18.5 h (FIG. 5C, FIG. 5D); 23 h (FIG. 5E, FIG. 5F); 42.5 h (FIG. 5G, FIG. 5H); 68 h (FIG. 5I, FIG. 5J). Dorsal view of pre-injection image (FIG. 5K). Dorsal and ventral views 70.5 h p.i. (FIG. 5L, FIG. 5M). Images after midline laparotomy (FIG. 5N) and individually harvested organs (FIG. 5O) on a Petri dish at 70.5 h p.i. Images were scaled to the same maximum (arbitrary units);
  • FIG. 6A-FIG. 6T show in vivo imaging of a NOD/SCID mouse (mouse #2) (left panel), bearing PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumors. Mouse #2 received 1 nmol of YC-27 and dorsal (animal prone) and ventral (animal supine) views were obtained. Dorsal and ventral views of the pre-injection image (FIG. 6A, FIG. 6B, respectively); 10 min p.i. (FIG. 6C, FIG. 6D); 20.5 h (FIG. 6E, FIG. 6F); 24 h (FIG. 6G, FIG. 6H). Images after midline laparotomy (FIG. 6I) and individually harvested organs (FIG. 6J) on a Petri dish at 24 h p.i. Right Panels: Mouse #3 in same orientation as mouse #2. Mouse #3 received 1 nmol of YC-27 co-injected with 1 μmol of DCIBzL, which served as a blocking agent to test binding specificity. Images were scaled to the same maximum (arbitrary units);
  • FIG. 7 shows PC3-PIP and PC3-flu cells treated with fluorescent compound YC-VIII-36 (green, top left) and DAPI (blue), and PC3-PIP and PC3-flu cells treated with both YC-VIII-36 and PSMA inhibitor, PMPA;
  • FIG. 8 shows PC3-PIP cells treated with DAPI (blue) and varying concentrations of YC-VIII-36 (green);
  • FIG. 9 shows time dependent internalization of YC-VIII-36 into PC3-PIP cells treated with YC-VIII-36 (green) and DAPI (blue);
  • FIG. 10 shows titration and detection of varying amounts of YC-VIII-36 injected subcutaneously into a nude mouse. (IVIS spectrum with 10 second exposure followed by spectral unmixing);
  • FIG. 11 shows fluorescence images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA− PC3-flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36;
  • FIG. 12 shows fluorescence images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA− PC3-flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36 180 minutes after injection (top) and biodistribution of exemplary compound YC-VIII-36 180 minutes after injection (bottom);
  • FIG. 13 shows FACS analysis showing the percent subpopulation of PSMA positive cells in PC3-flu, PC3-PIP, and LNCaP cells;
  • FIG. 14 shows cell sorting results for PC3-PIP cells treated with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36, including initial percentage (top center), and after 3 passages of sorting (bottom);
  • FIG. 15A-FIG. 15C show the number of spiked PIP-pos cells into 10 million of PC3-flu detectable by 100 nM compound YC-VIII-36 in flow cytometry (BD LSR-II). Gate P1 is total number of single cells counted; gate P2 at higher intensity is the number of Pip-pos cells detected and gate P3 at lower intensity;
  • FIG. 16 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ LNCaP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [99mTc]SRV32;
  • FIG. 17 . GE eXplore VISTA pseudodynamic PET image (co-registered with the corresponding CT image) of a PSMA+ LNCaP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with 0.2 mCi (7.4 MBq) of exemplary compound [68Ga]SRV27;
  • FIG. 18 . GE eXplore VISTA PET image (co-registered with the corresponding CT image) of a PSMA+ PIP and PSMA− flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with 0.2 mCi (7.4 MBq) of exemplary compound [Ga]SRV100;
  • FIG. 19 shows a synthetic scheme for exemplary compound SRV100 and [111In]SRV100;
  • FIG. 20 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC-3 PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [111In]SRV27;
  • FIG. 21 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC-3 PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [111In]SRV100;
  • FIG. 22 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC-3 PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary dual modality compound [111In]SRV73;
  • FIG. 23 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ LNCaP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [99mTc]SRV134B:
  • FIG. 24 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [99mTc]SRV134B;
  • FIG. 25 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PSMA− PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [99mTc]SRV134A; and
  • FIG. 26 shows SPECT-CT images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP (forward left flank) and PSMA− PC3-flu (forward right flank) tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound [99mTc]SRV134B.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • The presently disclosed subject matter now will be described more fully hereinafter with reference to the accompanying Figures, in which some, but not all embodiments of the inventions are shown. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout. The presently disclosed subject matter may be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will satisfy applicable legal requirements. Indeed, many modifications and other embodiments of the presently disclosed subject matter set forth herein will come to mind to one skilled in the art to which the presently disclosed subject matter pertains having the benefit of the teachings presented in the foregoing descriptions and the associated Figures. Therefore, it is to be understood that the presently disclosed subject matter is not to be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed and that modifications and other embodiments are intended to be included within the scope of the appended claims.
    • I. PSMA Targeted Fluorescent Agents for Image Guided Surgery
  • Minimally invasive medical techniques are intended to reduce the amount of extraneous tissue that is damaged during diagnostic or surgical procedures, thereby reducing patient recovery time, discomfort, and deleterious side effects. While millions of “open” or traditional surgeries are performed each year in the United States; many of these surgeries potentially can be performed in a minimally invasive manner. One effect of minimally invasive surgery, for example, is reduced post-operative recovery time and related hospital stay. Because the average hospital stay for a standard surgery is typically significantly longer than the average stay for an analogous minimally invasive surgery, increased use of minimally invasive techniques could save millions of dollars in hospital costs each year. While many of the surgeries performed in the United States could potentially be performed in a minimally invasive manner, only a portion currently employ these techniques due to instrument limitations, method limitations, and the additional surgical training involved in mastering the techniques.
  • Minimally invasive telesurgical systems are being developed to increase a surgeon's dexterity, as well as to allow a surgeon to operate on a patient from a remote location. Telesurgery is a general term for surgical systems where the surgeon uses some form of remote control, e.g., a servomechanism, or the like, to manipulate surgical instrument movements rather than directly holding and moving the instruments by hand. In such a telesurgery system, the surgeon is provided with an image of the surgical site at the remote location. While viewing the surgical site on a suitable viewer or display, the surgeon performs the surgical procedures on the patient by manipulating master control input devices, which in turn control the motion of instruments. These input devices can move the working ends of the surgical instruments with sufficient dexterity to perform quite intricate surgical tasks.
  • Surgery is the most commonly used treatment for clinically localized prostate cancer (PCa) and provides a survival advantage compared to watchful waiting. A pressing issue in surgery for PCa is the assurance of a complete resection of the tumor, namely, a negative surgical margin. Surgical techniques, including minimally invasive surgical techniques, such as tele-surgical systems, can be further aided by improving visualization of the tissue where the procedure is to be carried out. One way to improve visualization of tissue is through the use of dyes capable of targeted visualization of tissue, allowing a surgeon to either remove or spare the tissue.
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides low-molecular-weight compounds comprising PSMA-targeting ligands linked to near-infrared (NIR), closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes and methods of their use for visualizing tissue under illumination with NIR radiation, including methods for imaging prostate cancer (PCa).
  • While a variety of radiolabeled PSMA-targeting antibodies have been used for tumor imaging, low molecular weight agents are preferred due to more tractable pharmacokinetics, i.e., more rapid clearance from nontarget sites. A series of fluorescent agents has been previously reported and was tested in mice to good effect. See, for example, international PCT patent application publication no. WO2010/108125A2, for PSMA-TARGETING COMPOUNDS AND USES THEREOF, to Pomper et al., published Sep. 23, 2010, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety. Because of the favorable pharmacokinetic profile of this class of compounds, i.e., low nonspecific binding, lack of metabolism in vivo and reasonable tumor residence times, this series of compounds was extended to include Dylight800 fluorescent dyes. Thus, the presently disclosed compounds include a urea-based PSMA binding moiety linked to a Dylight™ 800 fluorescent dye (Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc., Rockford, Illinois, USA). The presently disclosed targeted fluorescent PSMA binding compounds may find utility in fluorescence image guided surgery and biopsy of PSMA positive tumors and tissues; the former providing visual confirmation of complete removal of PSMA-containing tissue.
    • A. Compound (3)
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides the following compound:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00014
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • The presently disclosed compounds can be made using procedures known in the art by attaching near IR, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes to prostate specific membrane antigen ligands via a linkage. For example, the prostate specific membrane antigen ligands used in the presently disclosed compounds can be synthesized as described in international PCT patent application publication no. WO 2010/108125, to Pomper et al., published Sep. 23, 2010, which is incorporated herein in its entirety. Compounds can assembled by reactions between different components, to form linkages such as ureas (—NRC(O)NR—), thioureas (—NRC(S)NR—), amides (—C(O)NR— or —NRC(O)—), or esters (—C(O)O— or —OC(O)—). Urea linkages can be readily prepared by reaction between an amine and an isocyanate, or between an amine and an activated carbonamide (—NRC(O)—). Thioureas can be readily prepared from reaction of an amine with an isothiocyanate. Amides (—C(O)NR— or —NRC(O)—) can be readily prepared by reactions between amines and activated carboxylic acids or esters, such as an acyl halide or N-hydroxysuccinimide ester. Carboxylic acids may also be activated in situ, for example, with a coupling reagent, such as a carbodiimide, or carbonyldiimidazole (CDI). Esters may be formed by reaction between alcohols and activated carboxylic acids. Triazoles are readily prepared by reaction between an azide and an alkyne, optionally in the presence of a copper (Cu) catalyst.
  • Prostate specific membrane antigen ligands can also be prepared by sequentially adding components to a preformed urea, such as the lysine-urea-glutamate compounds described in Banerjee et al. (J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). Other urea-based compounds may also be used as building blocks.
  • Exemplary syntheses of the near IR, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes used in the presently disclosed compositions are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,887,854 and 6,159,657 and are incorporated herein in their entirety. Additionally, some IR, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes of the presently disclosed subject matter are commercially available, including DyLight™ 800 (ThermoFisher).
  • As provided hereinabove, the presently disclosed compounds can be synthesized via attachment of near IR, closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes to prostate specific membrane antigen ligands by reacting a reactive amine on the ligand with a near IR dye. A wide variety of near IR dyes are known in the art, with activated functional groups for reacting with amines.
    • B. Compositions Comprising Compound (3)
  • In some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a composition comprising a unit dosage form of compound (3), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the composition is adapted for administration to a subject; and wherein, the unit dosage form delivers to the subject an amount between 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of compound (3). In some embodiments, the composition unit dosage form delivers to the subject the amount of about 0.01 mg/kg, about 0.05 mg/kg, about 0.10 mg/kg, about 0.20 mg/kg, about 0.30 mg/kg, about 0.35 mg/kg, about 0.40 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg, about 0.50 mg/kg, about 0.55 mg/kg, about 0.60 mg/kg, about 0.65 mg/kg, about 0.70 mg/kg, about 0.75 mg/kg, about 0.80 mg/kg, about 0.90 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg, about 2 mg/kg, about 4 mg/kg, about 6 mg/kg, or about 8 mg/kg. In some embodiments, the composition is dry and a single dose form.
  • The term “unit dosage form” as used herein encompasses any measured amount that can suitably be used for administering a pharmaceutical composition to a patient. As recognized by those skilled in the art, when another form (e.g., another salt the pharmaceutical composition) is used in the formulation, the weight can be adjusted to provide an equivalent amount of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • In some embodiments, the composition is lyophilized in a sterile container. In some embodiments, the composition is contained within a sterile container, wherein the container has a machine detectable identifier that is readable by a medical device.
  • As used herein, the term “sterile” refers to a system or components of a system free of infectious agents, including, but not limited to, bacteria, viruses, and bioactive RNA or DNA.
  • As used herein, the term “non-toxic” refers to the non-occurrence of detrimental effects when administered to a vertebrate as a result of using a pharmaceutical composition at levels effective for visualization of tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation (therapeutic levels).
  • As used herein, the term “machine detectable identifier” includes identifiers visible or detectable by machines including medical devices. In some instances, the medical device is a telesurgical system. Machine detectable identifiers may facilitate the access or utilization of information that is directly encoded in the machine detectable identifier, or stored elsewhere. Examples of machine detectible identifiers include, but are not limited to, microchips, radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, barcodes (e.g., 1-dimensional or 2-dimensional barcode), data matrices, quick-response (QR) codes, and holograms. One of skill in the art will recognize that other machine detectible identifiers are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • In some embodiments, the composition further comprises compound (3) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients in an oral dosage form. In some embodiments, the composition further comprises compound (3) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers in an injectable dosage form. In some embodiments, the composition further comprises compound (3) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients in a dosage form for direct delivery to a surgical site.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” and “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refer to a substance that aids the administration of an active agent to and absorption by a patient and can be included in the presently disclosed compositions without causing a significant adverse toxicological effect on the patient. Non-limiting examples of pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include water, NaCl, normal saline solutions, lactated Ringer's, normal sucrose, normal glucose, binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, coatings, sweeteners, flavors and colors, and the like. One of skill in the art will recognize that other pharmaceutical excipients are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include but not limited to any adjuvants, excipients, glidants, sweeteners, diluents, preservatives, dyes/colorants, flavoring agents, surfactants, wetting agents, dispersing agents, suspending agents, stabilizing agents, isotonic agents, solvents or emulsors.
  • The term “oral dosage form” as used herein refers to its normal meaning in the art (i.e., a pharmaceutical composition in the form of a tablet, capsule, caplet, gelcap, geltab, pill and the like).
  • The term “injectable dosage form” as used herein refers to its normal meaning in the art (i.e., refer to a pharmaceutical composition in the form of solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions.)
  • The presently disclosed compositions can be prepared in a wide variety of oral, parenteral and topical dosage forms. Oral preparations include tablets, pills, powder, dragees, capsules, liquids, lozenges, cachets, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, etc., suitable for ingestion by the patient. The presently disclosed compositions can also be administered by injection, that is, intravenously, intramuscularly, intracutaneously, subcutaneously, intraduodenally, or intraperitoneally. Also, the compositions described herein can be administered by inhalation, for example, intranasally. Additionally, the presently disclosed compositions can be administered transdermally. The compositions of this invention can also be administered by intraocular, insufflation, powders, and aerosol formulations (for examples of steroid inhalants, see Rohatagi, J. Clin. Pharmacol. 35:1187-1193, 1995; Tjwa, Ann. Allergy Asthma Immunol. 75:107-111, 1995). Accordingly, the presently disclosed subject matter also provides pharmaceutical compositions including a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • For preparing pharmaceutical compositions from the presently disclosed subject matter, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers can be either solid or liquid. Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, pills, capsules, cachets, suppositories, and dispersible granules. A solid carrier can be one or more substances, which may also act as diluents, flavoring agents, binders, preservatives, tablet disintegrating agents, or an encapsulating material. Details on techniques for formulation and administration are well described in the scientific and patent literature, see, e.g., the latest edition of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Maack Publishing Co, Easton PA (“Remington's”).
  • In powders, the carrier is a finely divided solid, which is in a mixture with the finely divided active component. In tablets, the active component is mixed with the carrier having the necessary binding properties in suitable proportions and compacted in the shape and size desired. The powders and tablets preferably contain from 5% or 10% to 70% of the compounds of the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • Suitable solid excipients include, but are not limited to, magnesium carbonate; magnesium stearate; talc; pectin; dextrin; starch; tragacanth; a low melting wax; cocoa butter; carbohydrates; sugars including, but not limited to, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol, starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; and gums including arabic and tragacanth; as well as proteins including, but not limited to, gelatin and collagen. If desired, disintegrating or solubilizing agents may be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings such as concentrated sugar solutions, which may also contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound (i.e., dosage). Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can also be used orally using, for example, push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating such as glycerol or sorbitol. Push-fit capsules can contain the presently disclosed compositions mixed with a filler or binders such as lactose or starches, lubricants such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the presently disclosed compositions may be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
  • Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions. For parenteral injection, liquid preparations can be formulated in solution in aqueous polyethylene glycol solution.
  • Aqueous solutions suitable for oral use can be prepared by dissolving the presently disclosed compositions in water and adding suitable colorants, flavors, stabilizers, and thickening agents as desired. Aqueous suspensions suitable for oral use can be made by dispersing the finely divided active component in water with viscous material, such as natural or synthetic gums, resins, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethylene oxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitol mono-oleate), or a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan mono-oleate). The aqueous suspension can also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose, aspartame or saccharin. Formulations can be adjusted for osmolarity.
  • Also included are solid form preparations, which are intended to be converted, shortly before use, to liquid form preparations for oral administration. Such liquid forms include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions. These preparations may contain, in addition to the active component, colorants, flavors, stabilizers, buffers, artificial and natural sweeteners, dispersants, thickeners, solubilizing agents, and the like.
  • Oil suspensions can be formulated by suspending the presently disclosed compositions in a vegetable oil, such as arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin; or a mixture of these. The oil suspensions can contain a thickening agent, such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents can be added to provide a palatable oral preparation, such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose. These formulations can be preserved by the addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid. As an example of an injectable oil vehicle, see Minto, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 281:93-102, 1997. The pharmaceutical formulations of the invention can also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase can be a vegetable oil or a mineral oil, described above, or a mixture of these. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums, such as gum acacia and gum tragacanth, naturally occurring phosphatides, such as soybean lecithin, esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, such as sorbitan mono-oleate, and condensation products of these partial esters with ethylene oxide, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan mono-oleate. The emulsion can also contain sweetening agents and flavoring agents, as in the formulation of syrups and elixirs. Such formulations can also contain a demulcent, a preservative, or a coloring agent.
  • The presently disclosed compositions can also be delivered as microspheres for slow release in the body. For example, microspheres can be formulated for administration via intradermal injection of drug-containing microspheres, which slowly release subcutaneously (see Rao, J. Biomater Sci. Polym. Ed. 7:623-645, 1995; as biodegradable and injectable gel formulations (see, e.g., Gao Pharm. Res. 12:857-863, 1995); or, as microspheres for oral administration (see, e.g., Eyles, J. Pharm. Pharmacol. 49:669-674, 1997). Both transdermal and intradermal routes afford constant delivery for weeks or months.
  • In another embodiment, the presently disclosed compositions can be formulated for parenteral administration, such as intravenous (IV) administration or administration into a body cavity or lumen of an organ. The formulations for administration will commonly comprise a solution of the presently disclosed compositions dissolved in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water and Ringer's solution, an isotonic sodium chloride. In addition, sterile fixed oils can conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid can likewise be used in the preparation of injectables. These solutions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter. These formulations may be sterilized by conventional, well-known techniques including radiation, chemical, heat/pressure, and filtration sterilization techniques. The formulations may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, toxicity adjusting agents, e.g., sodium acetate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium lactate and the like. The concentration of the presently disclosed compositions in these formulations can vary widely, and will be selected primarily based on fluid volumes, viscosities, body weight, and the like, in accordance with the particular mode of administration selected and the patient's needs. For IV administration, the formulation can be a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. This suspension can be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution of 1,3-butanediol.
  • In another embodiment, the formulations of the presently disclosed compositions can be delivered by the use of liposomes which fuse with the cellular membrane or are endocytosed, i.e., by employing ligands attached to the liposome, or attached directly to the oligonucleotide, that bind to surface membrane protein receptors of the cell resulting in endocytosis. By using liposomes, particularly where the liposome surface carries ligands specific for target cells, or are otherwise preferentially directed to a specific organ, one can focus the delivery of the presently disclosed compositions into the target cells in vivo. (See, e.g., Al-Muhammed, J. Microencapsul. 13:293-306, 1996; Chonn, Curr. Opin. Biotechnol. 6:698-708, 1995; Ostro, Am. J. Hosp. Pharm. 46:1576-1587, 1989).
  • Lipid-based drug delivery systems include lipid solutions, lipid emulsions, lipid dispersions, self-emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS) and self-microemulsifying drug delivery systems (SMEDDS). In particular, SEDDS and SMEDDS are isotropic mixtures of lipids, surfactants and co-surfactants that can disperse spontaneously in aqueous media and form fine emulsions (SEDDS) or microemulsions (SMEDDS). Lipids useful in the formulations of the presently disclosed subject matter include any natural or synthetic lipids including, but not limited to, sesame seed oil, olive oil, castor oil, peanut oil, fatty acid esters, glycerol esters, Labrafil®, Labrasol®, Cremophor®, Solutol®, Tween®, Capryol®, Capmul®, Captex®, and Peceol®.
  • In some embodiments the presently disclosed compositions are sterile and generally free of undesirable matter. The compounds and compositions may be sterilized by conventional, well known techniques including heat/pressure, gas plasma, steam, radiation, chemical, and filtration sterilization techniques.
  • For example, terminal heat sterilization can be used to destroy all viable microorganisms within the final formulation. An autoclave is commonly used to accomplish terminal heat-sterilization of drug products in their final packaging. Typical autoclave cycles in the pharmaceutical industry to achieve terminal sterilization of the final product are 121° C. for 15 minutes. The presently disclosed compositions can be autoclaved at a temperature ranging from 115 to 130° C. for a period of time ranging from 5 to 40 minutes with acceptable stability. Autoclaving is preferably carried out in the temperature range of 119 to 122° C. for a period of time ranging from 10 to 36 minutes.
  • The compositions can also be sterilized by dry heat as described by Karlsson, et al., in U.S. Pat. No. 6,392,036, which discloses a method for the dry heat sterilization that can be used for drug formulations. The compositions can also be sterilized as described in WO 02/41925 to Breath Limited, which discloses a rapid method, similar to pasteurization, for the sterilization of compositions. This method entails pumping the composition to be sterilized through stainless steel pipes and rapidly raising the temperature of the composition to about 130-145° C. for about 2-20 seconds, subsequently followed by rapid cooling in seconds to ambient conditions.
  • The compositions can also be sterilized by irradiation as described by Illum and Moeller in Arch. Pharm. Chem. Sci., Ed. 2, 1974, pp. 167-174). The compositions can also be sterilized by UV, x-rays, gamma rays, e beam radiation, flaming, baking, and chemical sterilization.
  • Alternatively, sterile pharmaceutical compositions according to the presently disclosed subject matter may be prepared using aseptic processing techniques. Aseptic filling is ordinarily used to prepare drug products that will not withstand heat sterilization, but in which all of the ingredients are sterile. Sterility is maintained by using sterile materials and a controlled working environment. All containers and apparatus are sterilized, preferably by heat sterilization, prior to filling. The container (e.g., vial, ampoule, infusion bag, bottle, or syringe) are then filled under aseptic conditions.
  • In some embodiments, the compounds and presently disclosed compositions are non-toxic and generally free of detrimental effects when administered to a vertebrate at levels effective for visualization of tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation. Toxicity of the compounds and presently disclosed compositions can be assessed by measuring their effects on a target (organism, organ, tissue or cell). Because individual targets typically have different levels of response to the same dose of a compound, a population-level measure of toxicity is often used which relates the probabilities of an outcome for a given individual in a population. Toxicology of compounds can be determined by conventional, well-known techniques including in vitro (outside of a living organism) and in vivo (inside of a living organism) studies.
  • For example, determination of metabolic stability is commonly examined when assessing the toxicity of a compound as it is one of several major determinates in defining the oral bioavailability and systemic clearance of a compound. After a compound is administered orally, it first encounters metabolic enzymes in the gastrointestinal lumen as well as in the intestinal epithelium. After it is absorbed into the bloodstream through the intestinal epithelium, it is first delivered to the liver via the portal vein. A compound can be effectively cleared by intestinal or hepatic metabolism before it reaches systemic circulation, a process known as first pass metabolism. The stability of a compound towards metabolism within the liver as well as extrahepatic tissues will ultimately determine the concentration of the compound found in the systemic circulation and affect its half-life and residence time within the body. Cytochrome P450 (CYP) enzymes are found primarily in the liver but also in the intestinal wall, lungs, kidneys and other extrahepatic organs and are the major enzymes involved in compound metabolism. Many compounds undergo deactivation by CYPs, either directly or by facilitated excretion from the body. Also, many compounds are bioactivated by CYPs to form their active compounds. Thus, determining the reactivity of a compound to CYP enzymes is commonly used to assess metabolic stability of a compound.
  • The Ames reverse mutation Assay is another common toxicology assay for assessing the toxicity of a compound. The Ames Assay, utilizes several different tester strains, each with a distinct mutation in one of the genes comprising the histidine (his) biosynthetic operon (Ames, B. N., et al., (1975) Mutation Res. 31:347-363). The detection of revertant (i.e., mutant) bacteria in test samples that are capable of growth in the absence of histidine indicates that the compound under evaluation is characterized by genotoxic (i.e. mutagenic) activity. The Ames Assay is capable of detecting several different types of mutations (genetic damage) that may occur in one or more of the tester strains. The practice of using an in vitro bacterial assay to evaluate the genotoxic activity of drug candidates is based on the prediction that a substance that is mutagenic in a bacterium is likely to be carcinogenic in laboratory animals, and by extension may be carcinogenic or mutagenic to humans.
  • In addition, the human ether-a-go-go related gene (hERG) assay can be used to evaluate the potential cardiotoxicity of a compound. Cardiotoxicity can arise when the QT interval is prolonged leading to an elevated risk of life-threatening arrhythmias. The QT interval is a measure of the time between the start of the Q wave and the end of the T wave in the heart's electrical cycle. The QT interval represents electrical depolarization and repolarization of the ventricles. A lengthened QT interval has most commonly been associated with loss of current through hERG potassium ion channels due to direct block of the ion channel by drugs or by inhibition of the plasma membrane expression of the channel protein (Su et al. J. Biomol Screen 2011, 16, 101-111). Thus, an in vitro hERG screening assay can be used to detect disruption or inhibition of the hERG membrane trafficking function and assess potential cardiotoxicity of a compound.
  • Other methods of assessing the toxicity of compounds include in vivo studies which administer relatively large doses of a test compound to a group of animals to determine the level which is lethal to a percentage of the population (mean lethal dose LD50 or mean lethal concentration LC50). Toxicity of a compound can also be assessed in vivo by examining whether a compound produces statistically significant negative effects on cardiac, blood pressure, central nervous system (CNS), body weight, food intake, gross or microscopic pathology, clinical pathology, or respiratory measures in an animal.
  • In some embodiments, the presently disclosed compositions can be lyophilized in a sterile container for convenient dry storage and transport. A ready-to-use preparation can subsequently be made by reconstituting the lyophilized compositions with sterile water. The terms “lyophilization,” “lyophilized,” and “freeze-dried” refer to a process by which the material to be dried is first frozen and then the ice or frozen solvent is removed by sublimation in a vacuum environment. An excipient may be included in pre-lyophilized formulations to enhance stability of the lyophilized product upon storage.
  • In some embodiments, the composition can be contained within a sterile container, where the container has a machine detectable identifier which is readable by a medical device. Examples of machine detectible identifiers include microchips, radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, barcodes (e.g., 1-dimensional or 2-dimensional barcode), data matrices, quick-response (QR) codes, and holograms. One of skill in the art will recognize that other machine detectible identifiers are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • In some embodiments, the machine detectable identifier can include a microchip, an integrated circuit (IC) chip, or an electronic signal from a microchip that is detectable and/or readable by a computer system that is in communication with the medical device. In some embodiments, the machine detectable identifier includes a radio frequency identification (RFID) tag. RFID tags are sometimes called as transponders. RFID tags generally are devices formed of an IC chip, an antenna, an adhesive material, and are used for transmitting or receiving predetermined data with an external reader or interrogator. RFID tags can transmit or receive data with a reader by using a contactless method. According to the amplitude of a used frequency, inductive coupling, backscattering, and surface acoustic wave (SAW) may be used. Using electromagnetic waves, data may be transmitted or received to or from a reader by using a full duplex method, a half duplex (HDX) method, or a sequential (SEQ) method.
  • In some embodiments, the machine detectable identifier can include a barcode. Barcodes include any machine-readable format, including one-dimensional and two-dimensional formats. One-dimensional formats include, for example, Universal Product Code (UPC) and Reduced Space Symbology (RSS). Two-dimensional formats, or machine-readable matrices, include for example, Quick Response (QR) Code and Data Matrix.
  • In some embodiments, the medical device can be configured to detect the machine detectable identifier. In one example, the medical device is a tele-surgical system that includes a special imaging mode (e.g., a fluorescence imaging mode) for use with dyes such as those described in this disclosure. One example of a tele-surgical system that includes a fluorescence imaging mode is described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,169,468, entitled “Augmented Stereoscopic Visualization for a Surgical Robot,” which is hereby incorporated in its entirety herein. In some embodiments, medical devices can incorporate an imaging device that can scan, read, view, or otherwise detect a machine detectable identifier that is displayed to the imaging device. In one aspect, the medical device will permit a user to access the fluorescence imaging mode of the medical device only if the medical device detects the presence of a known machine detectable identifier that corresponds to a dye identified as being compatible for use with the medical device. In contrast, if the medical device does not detect a known machine detectable identifier, the medical device will not permit a user to access the fluorescence imaging mode and associated functionality. Imaging devices can include optical scanners, barcode readers, cameras, and imaging devices contained within a tele-surgical system such as an endoscope. Information associated with the machine detectable identifier can then be retrieved by the medical device using an imaging device. Upon detection of the identifier, an automatic process may be launched to cause a predetermined action to occur, or certain data to be retrieved or accessed. The information encoded onto the machine detectable identifier may include instructions for triggering an action, such as administering a composition of the presently disclosed subject matter to a patient. In some embodiments, the machine detectable identifier includes unencrypted e-pedigree information in the desired format. The e-pedigree information can include, for example, lot, potency, expiration, national drug code, electronic product code, manufacturer, distributor, wholesaler, pharmacy and/or a unique identifier of the salable unit.
  • In some embodiments, the sterile container having a machine detectable identifier includes a fluid outlet configured to mate with the medical device. In some embodiments, the fluid outlet of the machine detectable identifier is mechanically affixed to the medical device.
    • C. Methods of Imaging Using Compositions Comprising Compound (3)
  • In some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a use of the composition comprising compound (3), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, adapted for administration to a subject, e.g., a patient, to obtain visualization of tissue expressing PSMA under illumination with near-infrared radiation, wherein the unit dosage form delivers to the subject an amount between about 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of compound (3). In some embodiments, the use is adapted for administration to a human patient to obtain visualization of human tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation wherein the unit dosage form delivers to the human patient an amount between about 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of a compound (3).
  • The compounds and presently disclosed compositions can be delivered by any suitable means, including oral, parenteral and topical methods. Transdermal administration methods, by a topical route, can be formulated as applicator sticks, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, gels, creams, ointments, pastes, jellies, paints, powders, and aerosol.
  • The pharmaceutical preparation is preferably in unit dosage form. In such form the preparation is subdivided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the compounds and presently disclosed compositions. The unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of preparation, such as packeted tablets, capsules, and powders in vials or ampoules. Also, the unit dosage form can be a capsule, tablet, cachet, or lozenge itself, or it can be the appropriate number of any of these in packaged form.
  • In some embodiments, co-administration can be accomplished by co-formulation, i.e., preparing a single pharmaceutical composition including the compounds and presently disclosed compositions and any other agent. Alternatively, the various components can be formulated separately.
  • The presently disclosed compositions, and any other agents, can be present in any suitable amount, and can depend on various factors including, but not limited to, weight and age of the patient, state of the disease, etc. Suitable dosage ranges include from about 0.01 and 8 mg/kg, or about 0.01 and 5 mg/kg, or about 0.01 and 1 mg/kg. Suitable dosage ranges also include 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.90, 1, 2, 4, 6, or 8 mg/kg.
  • The composition can also contain other compatible compositions. The compositions described herein can be used in combination with one another, with other active compositions known to be useful for visualization of tissue under illumination with near-infrared radiation, or with compositions that may not be effective alone, but may contribute to the efficacy of the active composition.
  • As used herein, the term “visualization” refers to methods of obtaining graphic images of tissue by any means, including illumination with near-infrared radiation.
  • The term “near-infrared radiation” or “near IR radiation” or “NIR” radiation refers to optical radiation with a wavelength in the range of about 700 nm to about 1400 nm. References herein to the optionally plural term “wavelength(s)” indicates that the radiation may be a single wavelength or a spectrum of radiation having differing wavelengths.
  • The term “tissue” as used herein includes, but is not limited to, allogenic or xenogenic bone, neural tissue, fibrous connective tissue including tendons and ligaments, cartilage, dura, fascia, pericardia, muscle, heart valves, veins and arteries and other vessels, dermis, adipose tissue, glandular tissue, prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, renal tissue, bladder tissue, lung tissue, breast tissue, pancreatic tissue, vascular tissue, tumor tissue, cancerous tissue, or prostate tumor tissue.
  • In particular embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for visualization of tissue expressing PSMA, the method comprising, administering to a subject, e.g., a patient, a composition comprising compound (3), described herein. In some embodiments, the method comprises, administering to a subject a composition comprising compound (3):
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00015
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the method administers to a subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a unit dosage form of compound (3), wherein the composition is sterile, non-toxic, and adapted for administration to a subject; and wherein, the unit dosage form delivers to the subject an amount between about 0.01 mg/kg and 8 mg/kg of compound (3). In some embodiments, the method further comprises obtaining the image during administration, after administration, or both during and after administration of the composition. In some embodiments, the method further comprises intravenously injecting a composition comprising compound (3) into a subject. In some embodiments, the composition is injected into a circulatory system of the subject.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises visualizing a subject area on which surgery is or will be performed, or for viewing a subject area otherwise being examined by a medical professional. In some embodiments, the method further comprises performing a surgical procedure on the subject areas based on the visualization of the surgical area. In some embodiments, the method further comprises viewing a subject area on which an ophthalmic, arthroscopic, laparoscopic, cardiothoracic, muscular, or neurological procedure is or will be performed. In some embodiments, the method further comprises obtaining ex vivo images of at least a portion of the subject.
  • In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is tumor tissue. In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is dysplastic or cancerous tissue. In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is prostate tissue. In some embodiments, the tissue being visualized is prostate tumor tissue.
  • In other embodiments, the one or more PSMA-expressing tumor or cell is selected from the group consisting of: a prostate tumor or cell, a metastasized prostate tumor or cell, a lung tumor or cell, a renal tumor or cell, a glioblastoma, a pancreatic tumor or cell, a bladder tumor or cell, a sarcoma, a melanoma, a breast tumor or cell, a colon tumor or cell, a germ cell, a pheochromocytoma, an esophageal tumor or cell, a stomach tumor or cell, and combinations thereof. In more particular embodiments, the one or more PSMA-expressing tumor or cell is a prostate tumor or cell. In certain embodiments, the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells are in vitro, in vivo, or ex vivo. In particular embodiments, the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells are present in a subject.
  • The “subject” treated by the presently disclosed methods in their many embodiments is desirably a human subject, although it is to be understood that the methods described herein are effective with respect to all vertebrate species, which are intended to be included in the term “subject.” Accordingly, a “subject” can include a human subject for medical purposes, such as for the treatment of an existing condition or disease or the prophylactic treatment for preventing the onset of a condition or disease, or an animal subject for medical, veterinary purposes, or developmental purposes. Suitable animal subjects include mammals including, but not limited to, primates, e.g., humans, monkeys, apes, and the like; bovines, e.g., cattle, oxen, and the like; ovines, e.g., sheep and the like; caprines, e.g., goats and the like; porcines, e.g., pigs, hogs, and the like; equines, e.g., horses, donkeys, zebras, and the like; felines, including wild and domestic cats; canines, including dogs; lagomorphs, including rabbits, hares, and the like; and rodents, including mice, rats, and the like. An animal may be a transgenic animal. In some embodiments, the subject is a human including, but not limited to, fetal, neonatal, infant, juvenile, and adult subjects. Further, a “subject” can include a patient afflicted with or suspected of being afflicted with a condition or disease. Thus, the terms “subject” and “patient” are used interchangeably herein. The term “subject” also refers to an organism, tissue, cell, or collection of cells from a subject.
  • In general, the “effective amount” of an active agent refers to the amount necessary to elicit the desired biological response. As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in this art, the effective amount of an agent or device may vary depending on such factors as the desired biological endpoint, the agent to be delivered, the makeup of the pharmaceutical composition, the target tissue, and the like.
  • In some embodiments, compound (3) is cleared from the subject's kidneys in about 24 hours.
  • In some embodiments, the presently disclosed methods use compounds that are stable in vivo such that substantially all, e.g., more than about 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or more preferably 90% of the injected compound is not metabolized by the body prior to excretion.
  • In other embodiments, the compound comprising the imaging agent is stable in vivo.
    • D. PSMA-Targeting Compounds and Uses Thereof
  • In further embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a compound having the structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00016
  • wherein: Z is tetrazole or CO2Q; each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group; FG is a fluorescent dye moiety which emits in the visible or near infrared spectrum; each R is independently H or C1-C4 alkyl; V is —C(O)—; W is —NRC(O); Y is —C(O); a is 1, 2, 3, or 4; m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R1 may be the same or different; R1 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, C6-C12 aryl, or alkylaryl having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms; R2 and R3 are independently H, CO2H, or CO2R4, where R4 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C6-C12 aryl, or alkylaryl having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms, wherein when one of R2 and R3 is CO2H or CO2R4, the other is H.
  • As used herein, a “protecting group” is a chemical substituent which can be selectively removed by readily available reagents which do not attack the regenerated functional group or other functional groups in the molecule. Suitable protecting groups are known in the art and continue to be developed. Suitable protecting groups may be found, for example in Wutz et al. (“Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Fourth Edition,” Wiley-Interscience, 2007). Protecting groups for protection of the carboxyl group, as described by Wutz et al. (pages 533-643), are used in certain embodiments. In some embodiments, the protecting group is removable by treatment with acid. Specific examples of protecting groups include but are not limited to, benzyl, p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), tertiary butyl (t-Bu), methoxymethyl (MOM), methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), tetrahydrofuranyl (THF), benzyloxymethyl (BOM), trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), and triphenylmethyl (trityl, Tr). Persons skilled in the art will recognize appropriate situations in which protecting groups are required and will be able to select an appropriate protecting group for use in a particular circumstance.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound has the following structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00017
  • In more certain embodiments, the compound has the following structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00018
  • In yet more certain embodiments, the compound has the following structure
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00019
  • In particular embodiments, R3 is CO2H and R2 is H or R2 is CO2H and R3 is H. In other embodiments, R2 is CO2R4 and R3 is H or R3 is CO2R4, and R2 is H. In yet other embodiments, R2 is H, and R3 is H.
  • In certain embodiments, R4 is C6-C12 aryl, or alkylaryl having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms. In certain embodiments, R1 is C6-C12 aryl.
  • In more certain embodiments, R1 is phenyl.
  • In particular embodiments, FG is a fluorescent dye moiety which emits in the near infrared spectrum. In more particular embodiments, FG comprises a fluorescent dye moiety selected from the group consisting of carbocyanine, indocarbocyanine, oxacarbocyanine, thiacarbocyanine and merocyanine, polymethine, coumarine, rhodamine, xanthene, fluorescein, boron-dipyrromethane (BODIPY), Cy5, Cy5.5, Cy7, VivoTag-680, VivoTag-S680, VivoTag-S750, AlexaFluor660, AlexaFluor680, AlexaFluor700, AlexaFluor750, AlexaFluor790, Dy677, Dy676, Dy682, Dy752, Dy780, DyLight547, Dylight647, HiLyte Fluor 647, HiLyte Fluor 680, HiLyte Fluor 750, IRDye 800CW, IRDye 800RS, IRDye 700DX, ADS780WS, ADS830WS, and ADS832WS. In yet more particular embodiments, FG has a structure selected from the group consisting of:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00020
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00021
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00022
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00023
  • In some embodiments, the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00024
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00025
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00026
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00027
    • E. Imaging
  • Embodiments include methods of imaging one or more cells, organs or tissues comprising exposing cells to or administering to a subject an effective amount of a compound with an isotopic label suitable for imaging. In some embodiments, the one or more organs or tissues include prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, vascular tissue or tumor tissue. The cells, organs or tissues may be imaged while within an organism, either by whole body imaging or intraoperative imaging, or may be excised from the organism for imaging.
  • In another embodiment, the imaging method is suitable for imaging studies of PSMA inhibitors, for example, by studying competitive binding of non-radiolabeled inhibitors. In still another embodiment, the imaging method is suitable for imaging of cancer, tumor or neoplasm. In a further embodiment, the cancer is selected from eye or ocular cancer, rectal cancer, colon cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and bladder cancer, oral cancer, benign and malignant tumors, stomach cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, corpus uteri, ovary cancer, prostate cancer, testicular cancer, renal cancer, brain cancer (e.g., gliomas), throat cancer, skin melanoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, Ewing's Sarcoma, Kaposi's Sarcoma, basal cell carcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma, small cell lung cancer, choriocarcinoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, angiosarcoma, hemangioendothelioma, Wilms Tumor, neuroblastoma, mouth/pharynx cancer, esophageal cancer, larynx cancer, lymphoma, neurofibromatosis, tuberous sclerosis, hemangiomas, and lymphangiogenesis.
  • The imaging methods of the invention are suitable for imaging any physiological process or feature in which PSMA is involved. Typically, imaging methods are suitable for identification of areas of tissues or targets which express high concentrations of PSMA. Typical applications include imaging glutamateric neurotransmission, presynaptic glutamatergic neurotransmission, malignant tumors or cancers that express PSMA, prostate cancer (including metastasized prostate cancer), and angiogenesis. Essentially all solid tumors express PSMA in the neovasculture. Therefore, methods of the present invention can be used to image nearly all solid tumors including lung, renal cell, glioblastoma, pancreas, bladder, sarcoma, melanoma, breast, colon, germ cell, pheochromocytoma, esophageal and stomach. Also, certain benign lesions and tissues including endometrium, schwannoma and Barrett's esophagus can be imaged according to the present invention.
  • The methods of imaging angiogenesis are suitable for use in imaging a variety of diseases and disorders in which angiogenesis takes place. Illustrative, non-limiting, examples include tumors, collagen vascular disease, cancer, stroke, vascular malformations, and retinopathy. Methods of imaging angiogenesis are also suitable for use in diagnosis and observation of normal tissue development.
  • PSMA is frequently expressed in endothelial cells of capillary vessels in peritumoral and endotumoral areas of various malignancies such that compounds of the invention and methods of imaging using same are suitable for imaging such malignancies.
  • Imaging agents of the invention may be used in accordance with the methods of the invention by one of skill in the art. Images can be generated by virtue of differences in the spatial distribution of the imaging agents which accumulate at a site when contacted with PSMA. The spatial distribution may be measured using any means suitable for the particular label, for example, a fluorescence camera and the like.
  • In general, a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent is administered to a subject. As used herein, “a detectably effective amount” of the imaging agent is defined as an amount sufficient to yield an acceptable image using equipment which is available for clinical use. A detectably effective amount of the imaging agent may be administered in more than one injection. The detectably effective amount of the imaging agent can vary according to factors such as the degree of susceptibility of the individual, the age, sex, and weight of the individual, idiosyncratic responses of the individual, and the dosimetry. Detectably effective amounts of the imaging agent can also vary according to instrument and film-related factors. Optimization of such factors is well within the level of skill in the art. The amount of imaging agent used for diagnostic purposes and the duration of the imaging study will depend upon the radionuclide used to label the agent, the body mass of the patient, the nature and severity of the condition being treated, the nature of therapeutic treatments which the patient has undergone, and on the idiosyncratic responses of the patient. Ultimately, the attending physician will decide the amount of imaging agent to administer to each individual patient and the duration of the imaging study.
  • In some embodiments, the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body quickly. Generally, the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body slowly enough to allow sufficient time for imaging or other use. Typically compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 24 hours. More typically, compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 16 hours, 12 hours, 8 hours, 6 hours, 4 hours, 2 hours, 90 minutes, or 60 minutes. Exemplary compounds are eliminated in between about 60 minutes and about 120 minutes.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, the compounds are designed to increase uptake in PSMA positive cells (i.e., tumor cells). For example, highly hydrophilic compounds may be excreted quickly. Compounds with increased hydrophobicity, such as compounds having hydrophobic linkers, may have longer circulation times, thereby providing more prolonged supply of tracer to bind to cells. According to embodiments of compounds according to the invention, hydrophobicity can be increased when, for example, p is 1 or more, or when R2 or R3 is CO2R4.
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method of imaging one or more cells, organs or tissues by exposing the cell to or administering to an organism an effective amount of a presently disclosed compound, where the compound includes a fluorescent dye moiety suitable for imaging.
    • F. Cell Sorting
  • Embodiments include methods for sorting cells by exposing the cells to a compound discussed above, where the compound includes a fluorescent dye moiety, followed by separating cells which bind the compound from cells which do not bind the compound.
  • Fluorescent compounds described above bind to PSMA on cells that express PSMA on the cell surface. In some cases, fluorescent compound is internalized. Cells binding the fluorescent compound appear fluorescent, and may be imaged using fluorescence microscopy. Fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS) or flow cytometry may be used to separate PSMA positive cells from PSMA negative cells.
  • Intraoperative Tumor Mapping Embodiments of the invention include methods of intraoperative tumor mapping or intraoperative photodiagnosis (PDD) by administering an effective amount of a compound discussed above to a subject, where the compound includes a fluorescent dye moiety. According to such embodiments, an effective amount of a compound is an amount sufficient to produce a detectable level of fluorescence when used for intraoperative tumor mapping or PDD. The compounds bind to, and may be internalized into, cells, particularly tumor cells, that express PSMA. The fluorescent compounds thereby define the boundaries of the tumor, allowing for accurate surgical removal. The compounds that includes a fluorescent dye moiety may also be used to visualize circulating tumor cells that express PSMA.
    • Kits
  • Other embodiments provide kits including a compound according to the invention. In certain embodiments, the kit provides packaged pharmaceutical compositions having a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the invention. In some embodiments the packaged pharmaceutical composition will include the reaction precursors necessary to generate the compound of the invention. Other packaged pharmaceutical compositions provided by the present invention further comprise indicia comprising at least one of: instructions for preparing compounds according to the invention from supplied precursors, instructions for using the composition to image cells or tissues expressing PSMA, or instructions for using the composition to image glutamatergic neurotransmission in a patient suffering from a stress-related disorder, or instructions for using the composition to image prostate cancer.
  • The imaging agent and carrier may be provided in solution or in lyophilized form. When the imaging agent and carrier of the kit are in lyophilized form, the kit may optionally contain a sterile and physiologically acceptable reconstitution medium such as water, saline, buffered saline, and the like. The kit may provide a compound of the invention in solution or in lyophilized form, and these components of the kit of the invention may optionally contain stabilizers such as NaCl, silicate, phosphate buffers, ascorbic acid, gentisic acid, and the like. Additional stabilization of kit components may be provided in this embodiment, for example, by providing the reducing agent in an oxidation-resistant form. Determination and optimization of such stabilizers and stabilization methods are well within the level of skill in the art.
    • G. PSMA-Targeting Compounds Comprising Metal Chelating Moieties and Uses Thereof G.1 Embodiments
  • As described herein, all embodiments or subcombinations may be used in combination with all other embodiments or subcombinations, unless mutually exclusive.
  • In some of the following embodiments, Z is CO2Q. In some of the following embodiments, Q is H. In some of the following embodiments, m is 4, 5, or 6. In some of the following embodiments, m is 6. In some of the following embodiments, n is 2, 3, or 4. In some of the following embodiments, n is 3. In some of the following embodiments, a is 3 or 4. In some of the following embodiments, a is 4. In some of the following embodiments, Y is —C(O)—. In some of the following embodiments, W is —NHC(O)—.
  • Embodiments of the invention include compounds having the structure
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00028
  • wherein the subunits associated with elements p, q, r, and s may be in any order. Z is tetrazole or CO2Q; each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group, a is 1, 2, 3, or 4, and R is each independently H or C1-C4 alkyl.
  • Variable r is 0 or 1. Tz is a triazole group selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00029
  • where L1 is
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00030
  • L2 is f-(CH2)b— or
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00031
      • X1 is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, —NRC(S)NR—, or —NRC(O)O—;
      • X2 is-C(O)NR—, —NRC(O)NR—, —NRC(S)NR—, Or —OC(O)NR—;
      • R5 is H, CO2H, or CO2R6, where R6 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl;
      • b is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and d is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
      • Variable q is 0 or 1. W is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, NRC(S)NR—, —NRC(O)O—, —OC(O)NR—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)NR—, or —C(O)O—;
      • R2 and R3 are independently H, CO2H, or CO2R4, where R4 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl, wherein if one of R2 and R3 is CO2H or CO2R2, then the other is H;
      • n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
      • Variable s is O or 1.
      • Y is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, —OC(O)—; and
      • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • Variable p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R1 may be the same or different.
  • R1 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl.
  • G is a moiety selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00032
      • where Ch is a metal chelating moiety, optionally including a chelated metal; FG is a fluorescent dye moiety which emits in the visible or near infrared spectrum; one of A and A1 is Ch and the other is FG;
      • V and V′ are independently —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, or —OC(O)—; and
      • g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • The following conditions also apply:
      • 1) when G is
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00033
      •  and r is 0, then q and s are both 1;
      • 2) when G is
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00034
      •  and r is 0, then q and s are both 0 or both 1;
      • 3) when G is
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00035
      •  then p is 0 and R2 is H, and the structure optionally includes a chelated metal ion;
      • 4) when G is
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00036
      •  and r is 0, then if p is 0, then one of R2 and R3 is CO2R2, and the other is H; and
      • 5) when g is
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00037
      •  then r is 0.
  • In some embodiments, Z is CO2Q. In some embodiments, Q is H. In some embodiments, m is 4, 5, or 6. In some embodiments, m is 6. In some embodiments, n is 2, 3, or 4. In some embodiments, n is 3. In some embodiments, a is 4. In some embodiments, subunits associated with elements p, q and s are in the order drawn and r may be in any location, including between one of p, q, or s. In some embodiments r is 0.
  • Embodiments include compounds having the structure
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00038
      • wherein
      • Z is tetrazole or CO2Q;
      • each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group,
      • a is 1, 2, 3, or 4, and R is each independently H or C1-C4 alkyl.
      • Ch is a metal chelating moiety optionally including a chelated metal.
      • W is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, NRC(S)NR—, —NRC(O)O—, —OC(O)NR—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)NR—, or —C(O)O—.
      • Y is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, —OC(O).
      • V is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, or —OC(O)—.
  • In exemplary embodiments:
      • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
      • n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; and
      • p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R4 may be the same or different.
      • R is H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl or C4-C16 alkylaryl.
      • R and R are independently H, CO2H, or CO2R4, where R4 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl, wherein when one of R2 and R3 is CO2H or CO2R2, the other is H, and when p is 0, one of R2 and R3 is CO2R4, and the other is H.
  • In some embodiments, the compound has the structure shown below.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00039
  • In some embodiments, the compound has the structure shown below.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00040
  • In some embodiments, p is 1, 2 or 3. When p is 2 or 3, each R1 may be the same or different. When two R1 groups are different, the two may be in any order. In some embodiments, p is 2. In some embodiments, p is 2, and both R1 are the same. In some embodiments, R1 is C2-C12 aryl. In some embodiments R1 is phenyl. In some embodiments, R3 is CO2H and R2 is H. In some embodiments, R2 is CO2H and R3 is H. In some embodiments, R2 and R3 are both H.
  • In some embodiments, p is 0. In some embodiments where p is 0, R2 is CO2R4, and R3 is H. In some embodiments where p is 0, R3 is CO2R4, and R2 is H. In some embodiments R4 is C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl. In some embodiments R4 is benzyl.
  • Ch is a metal chelating moiety optionally including a chelated metal. A metal chelating moiety is a chemical moiety that non-covalently binds a metal atom, usually with a plurality of non-covalent interactions. Ch includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound. For instance linking groups having alkyl, aryl, combination of alkyl and aryl, or alkyl and aryl groups having heteroatoms may be present in the chelating moiety. Numerous metal chelating moieties are known in the art. Any acceptable chelator can be used with the present invention as long as compatible and capable of chelating a desired metal. Examples of metal chelating moieties (Ch) include, but are not limited to 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA) and Diethylene-triaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA).
  • In some embodiments, Ch has a structure shown below.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00041
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00042
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00043
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00044
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00045
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00046
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00047
  • Examples of specific compounds include the compounds shown below.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00048
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00049
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00050
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00051
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00052
  • In some embodiments, the compound further includes a chelated metal. In some embodiments, the chelated metal is Tc, In, Ga, Y, Lu, Re, Cu, Ac, Bi, Pb, Sm, Sc, Co, Ho, Gd, Eu, Tb, or Dy. In some embodiments, the chelated metal is Tc, Ga, In, Cu, Y, Ac, Lu, Re, or Bi. In some embodiments the metal is an isotope, for example a radioactive isotope. In some embodiments, the isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-86, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-64, Cu-67, Co-55, Co-57, Sc-47, Ac-225, Bi-213, Bi-212, Pb-212, Sm-153, Ho-166, or Dy-166. In some embodiments, the isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-67, Ac-225, Bi-213, or Bi-212.
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a compound having the structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00053
      • wherein:
      • Z is tetrazole or CO2Q;
      • each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group;
      • a is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
      • R is each independently H or C1-C4 alkyl;
      • Ch is a metal chelating moiety optionally including a chelated metal, wherein Ch optionally includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound;
      • W is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, NRC(S)NR—, —NRC(O)O—, —OC(O)NR—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)NR—, or —C(O)O—;
      • Y is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, —OC(O);
      • V is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, or —OC(O)—;
      • m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
      • n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
      • p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R1 may be the same or different;
      • R1 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl; R2 and R3 are independently H, CO2H, or CO2R4, wherein R4 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl, wherein when one of R2 and R3 is CO2H or CO2R4, the other is H, and when p is 0, one of R2 and R3 is CO2R4, and the other is H; and
      • pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of formula (I) has the structure:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00054
  • In some embodiments of the compound of formula (I), Z is CO2Q; each Q is hydrogen; R is H; a is 4; m is 6; n is 3; p is 2; R1 is C2-C12 aryl, wherein the aryl may be substituted or unsubstituted and R1 may be the same or different; R2 is CO2H; R3 is H; W is —NRC(O)—, wherein R is H; V is —C(O)—; and Ch includes any additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound.
  • In certain embodiments, R1 is phenyl or a substituted phenyl. In particular embodiments, R1 is a phenyl substituted at 1, 2, 3, or 4 positions with a substituent group selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, hydroxyl, nitro, azido, amino, alkanoyl, carboxamido, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, aminoalkyl, carbocyclic aryl, arylalkyl, arylalkoxy, and a saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic heterocyclic group, may be further substituted. In more particular embodiments, R1 is a phenyl substituted with a halogen and a hydroxyl.
  • In some embodiments, the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, aryl, combination of alkyl and aryl, or alkyl and aryl groups having heteroatoms. In certain embodiments, the additional atoms or linkers necessary to attach the metal chelating moiety to the rest of the compound comprises an alkyl, wherein the alkyl may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • As used herein, “alkyl” is intended to include branched, straight-chain, and cyclic saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups. Examples of alkyl include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, {circumflex over ( )}-propyl, zsø-propyl, «-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, «-pentyl, and sec-pentyl. In certain embodiments, alkyl groups are C1-C6 alkyl groups or Ci-C4 alkyl groups. Particular alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, and 3-pentyl. The term “Ci-C6 alkyl” as used herein means straight-chain, branched, or cyclic Ci-C6 hydrocarbons which are completely saturated and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl. Examples of Ci-C6 alkyl substituents include methyl (Me), ethyl (Et), propyl (including rø-propyl (n-Pr, nPr), wo-propyl (i-Pr, 1Pr), and cyclopropyl (c-Pr, 0Pr)), butyl (including rø-butyl (n-Bu, ″Bu), zso-butyl (i-Bu, 1Bu), sec-butyl (s-Bu, sBu), tert-butyl (t-Bu, 1Bu), or cyclobutyl (c-Bu, 0Bu)), and so forth. “Cycloalkyl” is intended to include saturated ring groups, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl. Cycloalkyl groups typically will have 3 to about 8 ring members. In the term “(cycloalkyl)alkyl”, cycloalkyl, and alkyl are as defined above, and the point of attachment is on the alkyl group. This term encompasses, but is not limited to, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, and cyclohexylmethyl. The alkyl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Substituents are not counted towards the total number of atoms in the alkyl group, so long as the total atoms in the substituent(s) are not larger than the alkyl group.
  • As used herein, the term “aryl” includes aromatic groups that contain 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 2 to about 12 carbon atoms, and up to 3 heteroatoms as ring members. Examples of heteroatoms include nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atoms. The aryl group may have 0, 1, 2 or 3 heteroatoms as ring members. Examples of aryl groups include but are not limited to phenyl, biphenyl and naphthyl, including 1-napthyl and 2-naphthyl. Examples of aryl groups having heteroatoms include quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, quinazolinyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, triazinyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, and benzothiazolyl, among others. The aryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Substituents are not counted towards the total number of atoms in the aryl group, so long as the total atoms in the substituent(s) are not larger than the aryl group.
  • As used herein, the term “alkylaryl” includes alkyl groups, as defined above, substituted by aryl groups, as defined above. The aryl group may be connected at any point on the alkyl group. The term C4-Cj6 alkylaryl includes alkylaryl groups having a total of 4 to 16 carbon atoms, counting the carbon atoms on the alkyl group and aryl group together. Examples of alkylaryl groups include but are not limited to benzyl (phenylmethyl), phenyl ethyl, and naphthylmethyl. The alkylaryl group may be substituted or unsubstituted. Substituents are not counted towards the total number of atoms in the alkylaryl group, so long as the total atoms in the substituent(s) are not larger than the alkylaryl group.
  • The term “substituted,” as used herein, means that any one or more hydrogens on the designated atom or group is replaced with a substituent, provided that the designated atom's normal valence is not exceeded, and that the substitution results in a stable compound. When a substituent is oxo (keto, i.e., =0), then 2 hydrogens on an atom are replaced. The present invention is intended to include all isotopes (including radioisotopes) of atoms occurring in the present compounds. When the compounds are substituted, they may be so substituted at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3 or 4 positions, by one or more suitable groups such as those disclosed herein. Suitable groups that may be present on a “substituted” group include e.g., halogen; cyano; hydroxyl; nitro; azido; amino; alkanoyl (such as a C1-C6 alkanoyl group such as acyl or the like); carboxamido; alkyl groups (including cycloalkyl groups, having 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms); alkenyl and alkynyl groups (including groups having one or more unsaturated linkages and from 2 to about 8, such as 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, carbon atoms); alkoxy groups having one or more oxygen linkages and from 1 to about 8, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms; aryloxy such as phenoxy; alkylthio groups including those having one or more thioether linkages and from 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms; alkylsulfinyl groups including those having one or more sulfinyl linkages and from 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms; alkylsulfonyl groups including those having one or more sulfonyl linkages and from 1 to about 8 carbon atoms, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms; aminoalkyl groups including groups having one or more N atoms and from 1 to about 8, for example 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, carbon atoms; carbocyclic aryl having 4, 5, 6 or more carbons and one or more rings, (e.g., phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, or the like, each ring either substituted or unsubstituted aromatic); arylalkyl having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms, (e.g. benzyl); arylalkoxy having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings and from 6 to about 18 ring carbon atoms (e.g. O-benzyl); or a saturated, unsaturated, or aromatic heterocyclic group having 1 to 3 separate or fused rings with 3 to about 8 members per ring and one or more N, O or S atoms, (e.g. coumarinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, quinazolinyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, triazinyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, imidazolyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiazolyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl, and pyrrolidinyl). Such heterocyclic groups may be further substituted, e.g. with hydroxy, alkyl, alkoxy, halogen and amino.
  • As used herein, where an internal substituent is flanked by bonds (for example —NRC(O)—) the order of the atoms is fixed, the orientation of the group may not be reversed, and is inserted into a structure in the orientation presented. In other words —NRC(O)— is not the same as —C(O)NR—. As used herein the term C(O) (for example —NRC(O)—) is used to indicate a carbonyl (C═O) group, where the oxygen is bonded to the carbon by a double bond.
  • In some embodiments, Ch comprises a structure selected from the group consisting of:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00055
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00056
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00057
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00058
  • In particular embodiments, Ch comprises 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA).
  • In some embodiments, the compound of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00059
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00060
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00061
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00062
  • In some embodiments, Ch includes a chelated metal and the chelated metal comprises a radioactive isotope. In certain embodiments, the radioactive isotope is Tc-99m, In-111, Ga-67, Ga-68, Y-86, Y-90, Lu-177, Re-186, Re-188, Cu-64, Cu-67, Co-55, Co-57, Sc-47, Ac-225, Bi-213, Bi-212, Pb-212, Sm-153, Ho-166, or Dy-166. In particular embodiments, the radioactive isotope is Ga-68 or Lu-177.
  • Other embodiments include pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds described in any of the previous embodiments. As used herein, “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refer to derivatives of the disclosed compounds wherein the parent compound is modified by making non-toxic acid or base salts thereof. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, mineral or organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines; alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids; and the like. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the conventional non-toxic salts or the quaternary ammonium salts of the parent compound formed, for example, from non-toxic inorganic or organic acids. For example, conventional non-toxic acid salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, pamoic, malefic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicylic, mesylic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isethionic, HOOC—(CH2)n—COOH where n is 0-4, and the like. The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the present invention can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting free acid forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base (such as Na, Ca, Mg, or K hydroxide, carbonate, bicarbonate, or the like), or by reacting free base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate acid. Such reactions are typically carried out in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two. Generally, non-aqueous media like ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, or acetonitrile are used, where practicable. Lists of additional suitable salts may be found, e.g., in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, PA, p. 1418 (1985).
  • The compounds described in the above embodiments may be made using procedures known in the art. In general, the materials used will be determined by the desired structure, and the type of linkage used.
  • Often, the compounds are prepared by sequentially adding components to a preformed urea, such as the lysine-urea-glutamate compounds described in Banerjee et al. (J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). Other urea-based compounds may also be used as building blocks.
  • Compounds are assembled by reactions between different components, to form linkages such as ureas (—NRC(O)NR—), thioureas (—NRC(S)NR—), amides (—C(O)NR— or —NRC(O)—), or esters (—C(O)O— or —OC(O)—). Urea linkages may be readily prepared by reaction between an amine and an isocyanate, or between an amine and an activated carbonamide (—NRC(O)—). Thioureas may be readily prepared from reaction of an amine with an isothiocyanate. Amides (—C(O)NR— or —NRC(O)—) may be readily prepared by reactions between amines and activated carboxylic acids or esters, such as an acyl halide or N-hydroxysuccinimide ester. Carboxylic acids may also be activated in situ, for example, with a coupling reagent, such as a carbodiimide, or carbonyldiimidazole (CDI). Esters may be formed by reaction between alcohols and activated carboxylic acids. Triazoles are readily prepared by reaction between an azide and an alkyne, optionally in the presence of a copper (Cu) catalyst.
  • Protecting groups may be used, if necessary, to protect reactive groups while the compounds are being assembled. Suitable protecting groups, and their removal, will be readily available to one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • In this way, the compounds may be easily prepared from individual building blocks, such as amines, carboxylic acids, and amino acids.
  • Often, a Ch or FB group is placed on the compound by adding a metal chelating group or fluorescent dye to the compound toward the end of a synthesis, for example by reacting a reactive amine on the compound with an activated metal chelating group or fluorescent dye. A wide variety of metal chelating groups and fluorescent dyes are known in the art, with activated functional groups for reacting with amines. The type of metal chelating group will be determined, in part by the desired metal. Selecting a metal chelating group for a particular metal atom will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art. The fluorescent dye used with be determined, in part, by the desired wavelength of fluorescence, and may be readily selected by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Exemplary procedures for specific compounds are described in the Examples below. Other compounds within the scope of the claims can be prepared using readily apparent modifications of these procedures.
    • G.2 Uses
  • Compounds described above, including various radiolabeled compounds, may be used for diagnostic, imaging, or therapeutic purposes. In general, the suitability of a particular radioisotope for a particular purpose (i.e. imaging or therapeutic) is well understood in the art. Other exemplary embodiments are compounds used as precursors for radiolabeled compounds, in which a metal or radioactive isotope of a metal may be added to the compound. Some compounds according to the invention are intermediates for forming other compounds of the invention.
    • G.2.1 Imaging
  • Embodiments include methods of imaging one or more cells, organs or tissues comprising exposing cells to or administering to a subject an effective amount of a compound with an isotopic label suitable for imaging. In some embodiments, the one or more organs or tissues include prostate tissue, kidney tissue, brain tissue, vascular tissue or tumor tissue. The cells, organs or tissues may be imaged while within an organism, either by whole body imaging or intraoperative imaging, or may be excised from the organism for imaging.
  • In another embodiment, the imaging method is suitable for imaging studies of PSMA inhibitors, for example, by studying competitive binding of non-radiolabeled inhibitors. In still another embodiment, the imaging method is suitable for imaging of cancer, tumor or neoplasm. In a further embodiment, the cancer is selected from eye or ocular cancer, rectal cancer, colon cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, breast cancer and bladder cancer, oral cancer, benign and malignant tumors, stomach cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, corpus uteri, ovary cancer, prostate cancer, testicular cancer, renal cancer, brain cancer (e.g., gliomas), throat cancer, skin melanoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, Ewing's Sarcoma, Kaposi's Sarcoma, basal cell carcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma, small cell lung cancer, choriocarcinoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, angiosarcoma, hemangioendothelioma, Wilms Tumor, neuroblastoma, mouth/pharynx cancer, esophageal cancer, larynx cancer, lymphoma, neurofibromatosis, tuberous sclerosis, hemangiomas, and lymphangiogenesis.
  • The imaging methods of the invention are suitable for imaging any physiological process or feature in which PSMA is involved. Typically, imaging methods are suitable for identification of areas of tissues or targets which express high concentrations of PSMA. Typical applications include imaging glutamateric neurotransmission, presynaptic glutamatergic neurotransmission, malignant tumors or cancers that express PSMA, prostate cancer (including metastasized prostate cancer), and angiogenesis. Essentially all solid tumors express PSMA in the neovasculture. Therefore, methods of the present invention can be used to image nearly all solid tumors including lung, renal cell, glioblastoma, pancreas, bladder, sarcoma, melanoma, breast, colon, germ cell, pheochromocytoma, esophageal and stomach. Also, certain benign lesions and tissues including endometrium, schwannoma and Barrett's esophagus can be imaged according to the present invention.
  • The methods of imaging angiogenesis are suitable for use in imaging a variety of diseases and disorders in which angiogenesis takes place. Illustrative, non-limiting, examples include tumors, collagen vascular disease, cancer, stroke, vascular malformations, and retinopathy. Methods of imaging angiogenesis are also suitable for use in diagnosis and observation of normal tissue development.
  • PSMA is frequently expressed in endothelial cells of capillary vessels in peritumoral and endotumoral areas of various malignancies such that compounds of the invention and methods of imaging using same are suitable for imaging such malignancies. In certain embodiments, the radiolabeled compound is stable in vivo.
  • In certain embodiments, the radiolabeled compound is detectable by positron emission tomography (PET) or single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT). [00170] In some embodiments, the subject is a human, rat, mouse, cat, dog, horse, sheep, cow, monkey, avian, or amphibian. In another embodiment, the cell is in vivo or in vitro. Typical subjects to which compounds of the invention may be administered will be mammals, particularly primates, especially humans. For veterinary applications, a wide variety of subjects will be suitable, e. g. livestock such as cattle, sheep, goats, cows, swine and the like; poultry such as chickens, ducks, geese, turkeys, and the like; and domesticated animals particularly pets such as dogs and cats. For diagnostic or research applications, a wide variety of mammals will be suitable subjects including rodents (e.g. mice, rats, hamsters), rabbits, primates, and swine such as inbred pigs and the like. Additionally, for in vitro applications, such as in vitro diagnostic and research applications, body fluids and cell samples of the above subjects will be suitable for use such as mammalian, particularly primate such as human, blood, urine or tissue samples, or blood urine or tissue samples of the animals mentioned for veterinary applications. In other in vitro applications, the cells or tissues are present in culture or in suspension.
  • Imaging agents of the invention may be used in accordance with the methods of the invention by one of skill in the art. Images can be generated by virtue of differences in the spatial distribution of the imaging agents which accumulate at a site when contacted with PSMA. The spatial distribution may be measured using any means suitable for the particular label, for example, a gamma camera, a PET apparatus, a SPECT apparatus, a fluorescence camera and the like. The extent of accumulation of the imaging agent may be quantified using known methods for quantifying radioactive emissions. A particularly useful imaging approach employs more than one imaging agent, or a bimodal agent having a fluorescent dye moiety and a metal chelating group, such as those described above, to perform simultaneous studies.
  • In general, a detectably effective amount of the imaging agent is administered to a subject. As used herein, “a detectably effective amount” of the imaging agent is defined as an amount sufficient to yield an acceptable image using equipment which is available for clinical use. A detectably effective amount of the imaging agent may be administered in more than one injection. The detectably effective amount of the imaging agent can vary according to factors such as the degree of susceptibility of the individual, the age, sex, and weight of the individual, idiosyncratic responses of the individual, and the dosimetry. Detectably effective amounts of the imaging agent can also vary according to instrument and film-related factors. Optimization of such factors is well within the level of skill in the art. The amount of imaging agent used for diagnostic purposes and the duration of the imaging study will depend upon the radionuclide used to label the agent, the body mass of the patient, the nature and severity of the condition being treated, the nature of therapeutic treatments which the patient has undergone, and on the idiosyncratic responses of the patient. Ultimately, the attending physician will decide the amount of imaging agent to administer to each individual patient and the duration of the imaging study.
  • In some embodiments, the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body quickly to prevent prolonged exposure to the radiation of the radiolabeled compound administered to the patient. Generally, the compounds are excreted from tissues of the body slowly enough to allow sufficient time for imaging or other use. Typically compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 24 hours. More typically, compounds of the invention are eliminated from the body in less than about 16 hours, 12 hours, 8 hours, 6 hours, 4 hours, 2 hours, 90 minutes, or 60 minutes. Exemplary compounds are eliminated in between about 60 minutes and about 120 minutes.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, the compounds are designed to increase uptake in PSMA positive cells (i.e. tumor cells). For example, highly hydrophilic compounds may be excreted quickly. Compounds with increased hydrophobicity, such as compounds having hydrophobic linkers, may have longer circulation times, thereby providing more prolonged supply of tracer to bind to cells. According to embodiments of compounds according to the invention, hydrophobicity can be increased when, for example, p is 1 or more, or when R2 or R3 is CO2R4
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for imaging one or more prostate-specific membrane antigen (PSMA) tumors, or cells the method comprising contacting the one or more tumors, or cells, with an effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and making an image.
  • In some embodiments, the imaging comprises positron emission tomography (PET).
  • In some embodiments, the one or more PSMA-expressing tumors or cells is selected from the group consisting of a prostate tumor or cell, a metastasized prostate tumor or cell, a lung tumor or cell, a renal tumor or cell, a glioblastoma, a pancreatic tumor or cell, a bladder tumor or cell, a sarcoma, a melanoma, a breast tumor or cell, a colon tumor or cell, a germ cell, a pheochromocytoma, an esophageal tumor or cell, a stomach tumor or cell, and combinations thereof.
    • G.2.2 Therapeutic Uses
  • Embodiments of the invention include methods of treating a tumor comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound discussed above, where the compound includes a therapeutically effective radioisotope. The development of low molecular weight radiotherapeutic agents is much different from developing radiopharmaceuticals for imaging in that longer tumor residence times may be important for the former.
  • In some embodiments, the tumor cells may express PSMA, such as prostate tumor cells or metastasized prostate tumor cells. In other embodiments, a tumor may be treated by targeting adjacent or nearby cells which express PSMA. For example, vascular cells undergoing angiogenesis associated with a tumor may be targeted. Essentially all solid tumors express PSMA in the neovasculture. Therefore, methods of the present invention can be used to treat nearly all solid tumors including lung, renal cell, glioblastoma, pancreas, bladder, sarcoma, melanoma, breast, colon, germ cell, pheochromocytoma, esophageal and stomach. Also, certain benign lesions and tissues including endometrium, schwannoma and Barrett's esophagus can be treated according to the present invention. Examples of therapeutically effective radioisotopes include 90Y, 117Lu, 186Re, 188Re, 67Cu, 225Ac, 213Bi, 212Br, 67Ga, 111In, 153Sm, 212Pb, 131I and 211At.
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a method for treating a tumor comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound includes a therapeutically effective radioisotope.
    • G.3 Pharmaceutical Compositions and Kits
  • The compounds discussed herein can be formulated into various compositions, for use in diagnostic, imaging or therapeutic treatment methods. The compositions (e.g. pharmaceutical compositions) can be assembled as a kit. Generally, a pharmaceutical composition comprises an effective amount (e.g., a pharmaceutically effective amount, or detectably effective amount) of a compound described above.
  • A composition of the invention can be formulated as a pharmaceutical composition, which comprises a compound of the invention and pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. By a “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is meant a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e., the material may be administered to a subject without causing any undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the other components of the pharmaceutical composition in which it is contained. The carrier would naturally be selected to minimize any degradation of the active ingredient and to minimize any adverse side effects in the subject, as would be well known to one of skill in the art. For a discussion of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and other components of pharmaceutical compositions, see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18l ed., Mack Publishing Company, 1990. Some suitable pharmaceutical carriers will be evident to a skilled worker and include, e.g., water (including sterile and/or deionized water), suitable buffers (such as PBS), physiological saline, cell culture medium (such as DMEM), artificial cerebral spinal fluid, or the like.
  • A pharmaceutical composition or kit of the invention can contain other pharmaceuticals, in addition to the compound. The other agent(s) can be administered at any suitable time during the treatment of the patient, either concurrently or sequentially. [00183] One skilled in the art will appreciate that the particular formulation will depend, in part, upon the particular agent that is employed, and the chosen route of administration. Accordingly, there is a wide variety of suitable formulations of compositions of the present invention.
  • One skilled in the art will appreciate that a suitable or appropriate formulation can be selected, adapted or developed based upon the particular application at hand. Dosages for compositions of the invention can be in unit dosage form. The term “unit dosage form” as used herein refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for animal (e.g. human) subjects, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of an agent of the invention, alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents, calculated in an amount sufficient to produce the desired effect in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier, or vehicle. [00185] One skilled in the art can easily determine the appropriate dose, schedule, and method of administration for the exact formulation of the composition being used, in order to achieve the desired effective amount or effective concentration of the agent in the individual patient.
  • The dose of a composition of the invention, administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to produce at least a detectable amount of a diagnostic or therapeutic response in the individual over a reasonable time frame. The dose used to achieve a desired effect will be determined by a variety of factors, including the potency of the particular agent being administered, the pharmacodynamics associated with the agent in the host, the severity of the disease state of infected individuals, other medications being administered to the subject, etc. The size of the dose also will be determined by the existence of any adverse side effects that may accompany the particular agent, or composition thereof, employed. It is generally desirable, whenever possible, to keep adverse side effects to a minimum. The dose of the biologically active material will vary; suitable amounts for each particular agent will be evident to a skilled worker.
  • Other embodiments provide kits including a compound according to the invention. In certain embodiments, the kit provides packaged pharmaceutical compositions having a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the invention. In some embodiments the packaged pharmaceutical composition will include the reaction precursors necessary to generate the compound of the invention upon combination with a radionuclide. Other packaged pharmaceutical compositions provided by the present invention further comprise indicia comprising at least one of: instructions for preparing compounds according to the invention from supplied precursors, instructions for using the composition to image cells or tissues expressing PSMA, or instructions for using the composition to image glutamatergic neurotransmission in a patient suffering from a stress-related disorder, or instructions for using the composition to image prostate cancer.
  • In certain embodiments, a kit according to the invention contains from about 1 mCi to about 30 mCi of the radionuclide-labeled imaging agent described above, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The imaging agent and carrier may be provided in solution or in lyophilized form. When the imaging agent and carrier of the kit are in lyophilized form, the kit may optionally contain a sterile and physiologically acceptable reconstitution medium such as water, saline, buffered saline, and the like. The kit may provide a compound of the invention in solution or in lyophilized form, and these components of the kit of the invention may optionally contain stabilizers such as NaCl, silicate, phosphate buffers, ascorbic acid, gentisic acid, and the like. Additional stabilization of kit components may be provided in this embodiment, for example, by providing the reducing agent in an oxidation-resistant form.
  • Determination and optimization of such stabilizers and stabilization methods are well within the level of skill in the art.
  • A “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to a biocompatible solution, having due regard to sterility, p[Eta], isotonicity, stability, and the like and can include any and all solvents, diluents (including sterile saline, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, Lactated Ringer's Injection and other aqueous buffer solutions), dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic agents, and the like. The pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may also contain stabilizers, preservatives, antioxidants, or other additives, which are well known to one of skill in the art, or other vehicle as known in the art.
  • Accordingly, in some embodiments, the presently disclosed subject matter provides a kit comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
    • XXX II. Definitions
  • Although specific terms are employed herein, they are used in a generic and descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation. Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this presently described subject matter belongs.
  • While the following terms in relation to the presently disclosed compounds are believed to be well understood by one of ordinary skill in the art, the following definitions are set forth to facilitate explanation of the presently disclosed subject matter. These definitions are intended to supplement and illustrate, not preclude, the definitions that would be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art upon review of the present disclosure.
  • The terms substituted, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, and substituent, as used herein, refer to the ability, as appreciated by one skilled in this art, to change one functional group for another functional group on a molecule, provided that the valency of all atoms is maintained. When more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. The substituents also may be further substituted (e.g., an aryl group substituent may have another substituent off it, such as another aryl group, which is further substituted at one or more positions).
  • Where substituent groups or linking groups are specified by their conventional chemical formulae, written from left to right, they equally encompass the chemically identical substituents that would result from writing the structure from right to left, e.g., —CH2O— is equivalent to —OCH2—; —C(═O)O— is equivalent to —OC(═O)—; —OC(═O)NR— is equivalent to —NRC(═O)O—, and the like.
  • When the term “independently selected” is used, the substituents being referred to (e.g., R groups, such as groups R1, R2, and the like, or variables, such as “m” and “n”), can be identical or different. For example, both R1 and R2 can be substituted alkyls, or R1 can be hydrogen and R2 can be a substituted alkyl, and the like.
  • The terms “a,” “an,” or “a(n),” when used in reference to a group of substituents herein, mean at least one. For example, where a compound is substituted with “an” alkyl or aryl, the compound is optionally substituted with at least one alkyl and/or at least one aryl. Moreover, where a moiety is substituted with an R substituent, the group may be referred to as “R-substituted.” Where a moiety is R-substituted, the moiety is substituted with at least one R substituent and each R substituent is optionally different.
  • A named “R” or group will generally have the structure that is recognized in the art as corresponding to a group having that name, unless specified otherwise herein. For the purposes of illustration, certain representative “R” groups as set forth above are defined below.
  • Description of compounds of the present disclosure is limited by principles of chemical bonding known to those skilled in the art. Accordingly, where a group may be substituted by one or more of a number of substituents, such substitutions are selected so as to comply with principles of chemical bonding and to give compounds which are not inherently unstable and/or would be known to one of ordinary skill in the art as likely to be unstable under ambient conditions, such as aqueous, neutral, and several known physiological conditions. For example, a heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl is attached to the remainder of the molecule via a ring heteroatom in compliance with principles of chemical bonding known to those skilled in the art thereby avoiding inherently unstable compounds.
  • Unless otherwise explicitly defined, a “substituent group,” as used herein, includes a functional group selected from one or more of the following moieties, which are defined herein:
  • The term hydrocarbon, as used herein, refers to any chemical group comprising hydrogen and carbon. The hydrocarbon may be substituted or unsubstituted. As would be known to one skilled in this art, all valencies must be satisfied in making any substitutions. The hydrocarbon may be unsaturated, saturated, branched, unbranched, cyclic, polycyclic, or heterocyclic. Illustrative hydrocarbons are further defined herein below and include, for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, allyl, vinyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, ethynyl, cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • The term “alkyl,” by itself or as part of another substituent, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight (i.e., unbranched) or branched chain, acyclic or cyclic hydrocarbon group, or combination thereof, which may be fully saturated, mono- or polyunsaturated and can include di- and multivalent groups, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., C1-C10 means one to ten carbons, including 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 carbons). In particular embodiments, the term “alkyl” refers to C1-20 inclusive, including 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20 carbons, linear (i.e., “straight-chain”), branched, or cyclic, saturated or at least partially and in some embodiments fully unsaturated (i.e., alkenyl and alkynyl) hydrocarbon radicals derived from a hydrocarbon moiety containing between one and twenty carbon atoms by removal of a single hydrogen atom.
  • Representative saturated hydrocarbon groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, sec-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, n-hexyl, sec-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-undecyl, dodecyl, cyclohexyl, (cyclohexyl)methyl, cyclopropylmethyl, and homologs and isomers thereof.
  • “Branched” refers to an alkyl group in which a lower alkyl group, such as methyl, ethyl or propyl, is attached to a linear alkyl chain. “Lower alkyl” refers to an alkyl group having 1 to about 8 carbon atoms (i.e., a C1-8 alkyl), e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 carbon atoms. “Higher alkyl” refers to an alkyl group having about 10 to about 20 carbon atoms, e.g., 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 carbon atoms. In certain embodiments, “alkyl” refers, in particular, to C1-8 straight-chain alkyls. In other embodiments, “alkyl” refers, in particular, to C1-8 branched-chain alkyls.
  • Alkyl groups can optionally be substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) with one or more alkyl group substituents, which can be the same or different. The term “alkyl group substituent” includes but is not limited to alkyl, substituted alkyl, halo, arylamino, acyl, hydroxyl, aryloxyl, alkoxyl, alkylthio, arylthio, aralkyloxyl, aralkylthio, carboxyl, alkoxycarbonyl, oxo, and cycloalkyl. There can be optionally inserted along the alkyl chain one or more oxygen, sulfur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, wherein the nitrogen substituent is hydrogen, lower alkyl (also referred to herein as “alkylaminoalkyl”), or aryl.
  • Thus, as used herein, the term “substituted alkyl” includes alkyl groups, as defined herein, in which one or more atoms or functional groups of the alkyl group are replaced with another atom or functional group, including for example, alkyl, substituted alkyl, halogen, aryl, substituted aryl, alkoxyl, hydroxyl, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, and mercapto.
  • The term “heteroalkyl,” by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon group, or combinations thereof, consisting of at least one carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of O, N, P, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s) O, N, P and S and Si may be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group or at the position at which alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples include, but are not limited to, —CH2—CH2—O—CH3, —CH2—CH2—NH—CH3, —CH2—CH2—N(CH3)—CH3, —CH2—S—CH2—CH3, —CH2—CH25—S(O)—CH3, —CH2—CH2—S(O)2—CH3, —CH═CHO—CH3, —Si(CH3)3, —CH2—CH═N—OCH3, —CH═CH—N(CH3)—CH3, O—CH3, —O—CH2—CH3, and —CN. Up to two or three heteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH2—NH—OCH3 and —CH2—O—Si(CH3)3.
  • As described above, heteroalkyl groups, as used herein, include those groups that are attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom, such as —C(O)NR′, —NR′R″, —OR′, —SR, —S(O)R, and/or —S(O2)R′. Where “heteroalkyl” is recited, followed by recitations of specific heteroalkyl groups, such as —NR′R or the like, it will be understood that the terms heteroalkyl and —NR′R″ are not redundant or mutually exclusive. Rather, the specific heteroalkyl groups are recited to add clarity. Thus, the term “heteroalkyl” should not be interpreted herein as excluding specific heteroalkyl groups, such as —NR′R″ or the like.
  • “Cyclic” and “cycloalkyl” refer to a non-aromatic mono- or multicyclic ring system of about 3 to about 10 carbon atoms, e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 carbon atoms. The cycloalkyl group can be optionally partially unsaturated. The cycloalkyl group also can be optionally substituted with an alkyl group substituent as defined herein, oxo, and/or alkylene. There can be optionally inserted along the cyclic alkyl chain one or more oxygen, sulfur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms, wherein the nitrogen substituent is hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or substituted aryl, thus providing a heterocyclic group. Representative monocyclic cycloalkyl rings include cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl. Multicyclic cycloalkyl rings include adamantyl, octahydronaphthyl, decalin, camphor, camphane, and noradamantyl, and fused ring systems, such as dihydro- and tetrahydronaphthalene, and the like.
  • The term “cycloalkylalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a cycloalkyl group as defined hereinabove, which is attached to the parent molecular moiety through an alkyl group, also as defined above. Examples of cycloalkylalkyl groups include cyclopropylmethyl and cyclopentylethyl.
  • The terms “cycloheteroalkyl” or “heterocycloalkyl” refer to a non-aromatic ring system, unsaturated or partially unsaturated ring system, such as a 3- to 10-member substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl ring system, including one or more heteroatoms, which can be the same or different, and are selected from the group consisting of nitrogen (N), oxygen (O), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), and silicon (Si), and optionally can include one or more double bonds.
  • The cycloheteroalkyl ring can be optionally fused to or otherwise attached to other cycloheteroalkyl rings and/or non-aromatic hydrocarbon rings. Heterocyclic rings include those having from one to three heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen, in which the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized. In certain embodiments, the term heterocylic refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring or a polycyclic group wherein at least one ring atom is a heteroatom selected from O, S, and N (wherein the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized), including, but not limited to, a bi- or tri-cyclic group, comprising fused six-membered rings having between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from the oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen, wherein (i) each 5-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, each 6-membered ring has 0 to 2 double bonds, and each 7-membered ring has 0 to 3 double bonds, (ii) the nitrogen and sulfur heteroatoms may be optionally oxidized, (iii) the nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized, and (iv) any of the above heterocyclic rings may be fused to an aryl or heteroaryl ring. Representative cycloheteroalkyl ring systems include, but are not limited to pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, piperidyl, piperazinyl, indolinyl, quinuclidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiadiazinanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkyl” and “heterocycloalkyl”, by themselves or in combination with other terms, represent, unless otherwise stated, cyclic versions of “alkyl” and “heteroalkyl”, respectively. Additionally, for heterocycloalkyl, a heteroatom can occupy the position at which the heterocycle is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Examples of cycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohexenyl, 3-cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like. Examples of heterocycloalkyl include, but are not limited to, 1-(1,2,5,6-tetrahydropyridyl), 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 3-morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuran-2-yl, tetrahydrofuran-3-yl, tetrahydrothien-2-yl, tetrahydrothien-3-yl, 1-piperazinyl, 2-piperazinyl, and the like. The terms “cycloalkylene” and “heterocycloalkylene” refer to the divalent derivatives of cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl, respectively.
  • An unsaturated alkyl group is one having one or more double bonds or triple bonds. Examples of unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers. Alkyl groups that are limited to hydrocarbon groups are termed “homoalkyl.”
  • More particularly, the term “alkenyl” as used herein refers to a monovalent group derived from a C1-20 inclusive straight or branched hydrocarbon moiety having at least one carbon-carbon double bond by the removal of a single hydrogen molecule. Alkenyl groups include, for example, ethenyl (i.e., vinyl), propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, pentenyl, hexenyl, octenyl, allenyl, and butadienyl.
  • The term “cycloalkenyl” as used herein refers to a cyclic hydrocarbon containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadiene, cyclohexenyl, 1,3-cyclohexadiene, cycloheptenyl, cycloheptatrienyl, and cyclooctenyl.
  • The term “alkynyl” as used herein refers to a monovalent group derived from a straight or branched C1-20 hydrocarbon of a designed number of carbon atoms containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. Examples of “alkynyl” include ethynyl, 2-propynyl (propargyl), 1-propynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, and heptynyl groups, and the like.
  • The term “alkylene” by itself or a part of another substituent refers to a straight or branched bivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group derived from an alkyl group having from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 carbon atoms. The alkylene group can be straight, branched or cyclic. The alkylene group also can be optionally unsaturated and/or substituted with one or more “alkyl group substituents.” There can be optionally inserted along the alkylene group one or more oxygen, sulfur or substituted or unsubstituted nitrogen atoms (also referred to herein as “alkylaminoalkyl”), wherein the nitrogen substituent is alkyl as previously described. Exemplary alkylene groups include methylene (—CH2—); ethylene (—CH2—CH2—); propylene (—(CH2)3—); cyclohexylene (—C6H10—); —CH═CH—CH═CH—; —CH═CH—CH2—; —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, —CH2CH═CHCH2—, —CH2CsCCH2—, —CH2CH2CH(CH2CH2CH3)CH2—, —(CH2)q—N(R)—(CH2)r—, wherein each of q and r is independently an integer from 0 to about 20, e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20, and R is hydrogen or lower alkyl; methylenedioxyl (—O—CH2—O—); and ethylenedioxyl (—O—(CH2)2—O—). An alkylene group can have about 2 to about 3 carbon atoms and can further have 6-20 carbons. Typically, an alkyl (or alkylene) group will have from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, with those groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms being some embodiments of the present disclosure. A “lower alkyl” or “lower alkylene” is a shorter chain alkyl or alkylene group, generally having eight or fewer carbon atoms.
  • The term “heteroalkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent group derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified, but not limited by, —CH2—CH2—S—CH2—CH2— and —CH2—S—CH2—CH2—NH—CH2—. For heteroalkylene groups, heteroatoms also can occupy either or both of the chain termini (e.g., alkyleneoxo, alkylenedioxo, alkyleneamino, alkylenediamino, and the like). Still further, for alkylene and heteroalkylene linking groups, no orientation of the linking group is implied by the direction in which the formula of the linking group is written. For example, the formula —C(O)OR′— represents both —C(O)OR′— and —R′OC(O)—.
  • The term “aryl” means, unless otherwise stated, an aromatic hydrocarbon substituent that can be a single ring or multiple rings (such as from 1 to 3 rings), which are fused together or linked covalently. The term “heteroaryl” refers to aryl groups (or rings) that contain from one to four heteroatoms (in each separate ring in the case of multiple rings) selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized. A heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a carbon or heteroatom. Non-limiting examples of aryl and heteroaryl groups include phenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-biphenyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 2-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrrolyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, 2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl, 5-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-isoxazolyl, 5-isoxazolyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, 5-thiazolyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl, 4-pyrimidyl, 5-benzothiazolyl, purinyl, 2-benzimidazolyl, 5-indolyl, 1-isoquinolyl, 5-isoquinolyl, 2-quinoxalinyl, 5-quinoxalinyl, 3-quinolyl, and 6-quinolyl. Substituents for each of above noted aryl and heteroaryl ring systems are selected from the group of acceptable substituents described below. The terms “arylene” and “heteroarylene” refer to the divalent forms of aryl and heteroaryl, respectively.
  • For brevity, the term “aryl” when used in combination with other terms (e.g., aryloxy, arylthioxy, arylalkyl) includes both aryl and heteroaryl rings as defined above. Thus, the terms “arylalkyl” and “heteroarylalkyl” are meant to include those groups in which an aryl or heteroaryl group is attached to an alkyl group (e.g., benzyl, phenethyl, pyridylmethyl, furylmethyl, and the like) including those alkyl groups in which a carbon atom (e.g., a methylene group) has been replaced by, for example, an oxygen atom (e.g., phenoxymethyl, 2-pyridyloxymethyl, 3-(1-naphthyloxy)propyl, and the like). However, the term “haloaryl,” as used herein is meant to cover only aryls substituted with one or more halogens.
  • Where a heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or heteroaryl includes a specific number of members (e.g. “3 to 7 membered”), the term “member” refers to a carbon or heteroatom.
  • Further, a structure represented generally by the formula:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00063
  • as used herein refers to a ring structure, for example, but not limited to a 3-carbon, a 4-carbon, a 5-carbon, a 6-carbon, a 7-carbon, and the like, aliphatic and/or aromatic cyclic compound, including a saturated ring structure, a partially saturated ring structure, and an unsaturated ring structure, comprising a substituent R group, wherein the R group can be present or absent, and when present, one or more R groups can each be substituted on one or more available carbon atoms of the ring structure. The presence or absence of the R group and number of R groups is determined by the value of the variable “n,” which is an integer generally having a value ranging from 0 to the number of carbon atoms on the ring available for substitution. Each R group, if more than one, is substituted on an available carbon of the ring structure rather than on another R group. For example, the structure above where n is 0 to 2 would comprise compound groups including, but not limited to:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00064
  • and the like.
  • A dashed line representing a bond in a cyclic ring structure indicates that the bond can be either present or absent in the ring. That is, a dashed line representing a bond in a cyclic ring structure indicates that the ring structure is selected from the group consisting of a saturated ring structure, a partially saturated ring structure, and an unsaturated ring structure.
  • The symbol (
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-P00001
    ) denotes the point of attachment of a moiety to the remainder of the molecule.
  • When a named atom of an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic aromatic ring is defined as being “absent,” the named atom is replaced by a direct bond.
  • Each of above terms (e.g., “alkyl,” “heteroalkyl,” “cycloalkyl, and “heterocycloalkyl”, “aryl,” “heteroaryl,” “phosphonate,” and “sulfonate” as well as their divalent derivatives) are meant to include both substituted and unsubstituted forms of the indicated group. Optional substituents for each type of group are provided below.
  • Substituents for alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl monovalent and divalent derivative groups (including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, heteroalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and heterocycloalkenyl) can be one or more of a variety of groups selected from, but not limited to: —OR′, ═O, ═NR′, ═N—OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, -halogen, —SiR′R″R′″, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO2R′, —C(O)NR′R″, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR″R′″, —NR″C(O)OR′, —NR—C(NR′R″)═NR′″, —S(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R″, —NRSO2R′, —CN and —NO2 in a number ranging from zero to (2m′+1), where m′ is the total number of carbon atoms in such groups. R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ each may independently refer to hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl (e.g., aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens), substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups, or arylalkyl groups. As used herein, an “alkoxy” group is an alkyl attached to the remainder of the molecule through a divalent oxygen. When a compound of the disclosure includes more than one R group, for example, each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ groups when more than one of these groups is present. When R′ and R″ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring. For example, —NR′R″ is meant to include, but not be limited to, 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. From the above discussion of substituents, one of skill in the art will understand that the term “alkyl” is meant to include groups including carbon atoms bound to groups other than hydrogen groups, such as haloalkyl (e.g., —CF3 and —CH2CF3) and acyl (e.g., —C(O)CH3, —C(O)CF3, —C(O)CH2OCH3, and the like).
  • Similar to the substituents described for alkyl groups above, exemplary substituents for aryl and heteroaryl groups (as well as their divalent derivatives) are varied and are selected from, for example: halogen, —OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —SiR′R″R9′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO2R′, —C(O)NR′R″, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR′—C(O)NR″R′″, —NR″C(O)OR′, —NR—C(NR′R″R′″)═NR″″, —NR—C(NR′R″)═NR′″—S(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R″, —NRSO2R′, —CN and —NO2, —R′, —N3, —CH(Ph)2, fluoro(C1-C4)alkoxo, and fluoro(C1-C4)alkyl, in a number ranging from zero to the total number of open valences on aromatic ring system; and where R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ may be independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. When a compound of the disclosure includes more than one R group, for example, each of the R groups is independently selected as are each R′, R″, R′″ and R″″ groups when more than one of these groups is present.
  • Two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally form a ring of the formula -T-C(O)—(CRR′)q—U—, wherein T and U are independently —NR—, —O—, —CRR′— or a single bond, and q is an integer of from 0 to 3. Alternatively, two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula -A-(CH2)r—B—, wherein A and B are independently —CRR′—, —O—, —NR—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)2NR′— or a single bond, and r is an integer of from 1 to 4.
  • One of the single bonds of the new ring so formed may optionally be replaced with a double bond. Alternatively, two of the substituents on adjacent atoms of aryl or heteroaryl ring may optionally be replaced with a substituent of the formula —(CRR′)s—X′—(C″R′″)d—, where s and d are independently integers of from 0 to 3, and X′ is —O—, —NR′—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, or —S(O)2NR′—. The substituents R, R′, R″ and R′″ may be independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • As used herein, the term “acyl” refers to an organic acid group wherein the —OH of the carboxyl group has been replaced with another substituent and has the general formula RC(═O)—, wherein R is an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, carbocylic, heterocyclic, or aromatic heterocyclic group as defined herein). As such, the term “acyl” specifically includes arylacyl groups, such as a 2-(furan-2-yl)acetyl)- and a 2-phenylacetyl group. Specific examples of acyl groups include acetyl and benzoyl. Acyl groups also are intended to include amides, —RC(═O)NR′, esters, —RC(═O)OR′, ketones, —RC(═O)R′, and aldehydes, —RC(═O)H.
  • The terms “alkoxyl” or “alkoxy” are used interchangeably herein and refer to a saturated (i.e., alkyl-O—) or unsaturated (i.e., alkenyl-O— and alkynyl-O—) group attached to the parent molecular moiety through an oxygen atom, wherein the terms “alkyl,” “alkenyl,” and “alkynyl” are as previously described and can include C1-20 inclusive, linear, branched, or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated oxo-hydrocarbon chains, including, for example, methoxyl, ethoxyl, propoxyl, isopropoxyl, n-butoxyl, sec-butoxyl, tert-butoxyl, and n-pentoxyl, neopentoxyl, n-hexoxyl, and the like.
  • The term “alkoxyalkyl” as used herein refers to an alkyl-O-alkyl ether, for example, a methoxyethyl or an ethoxymethyl group.
  • “Aryloxyl” refers to an aryl-O— group wherein the aryl group is as previously described, including a substituted aryl. The term “aryloxyl” as used herein can refer to phenyloxyl or hexyloxyl, and alkyl, substituted alkyl, halo, or alkoxyl substituted phenyloxyl or hexyloxyl.
  • “Aralkyl” refers to an aryl-alkyl-group wherein aryl and alkyl are as previously described, and included substituted aryl and substituted alkyl. Exemplary aralkyl groups include benzyl, phenylethyl, and naphthylmethyl.
  • “Aralkyloxyl” refers to an aralkyl-O— group wherein the aralkyl group is as previously described. An exemplary aralkyloxyl group is benzyloxyl, i.e., C6H5—CH2—O—. An aralkyloxyl group can optionally be substituted.
  • “Alkoxycarbonyl” refers to an alkyl-O—C(═O)— group. Exemplary alkoxycarbonyl groups include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, butyloxycarbonyl, and tert-butyloxycarbonyl.
  • “Aryloxycarbonyl” refers to an aryl-O—C(═O)— group. Exemplary aryloxycarbonyl groups include phenoxy- and naphthoxy-carbonyl.
  • “Aralkoxycarbonyl” refers to an aralkyl-O—C(═O)— group. An exemplary aralkoxycarbonyl group is benzyloxycarbonyl.
  • “Carbamoyl” refers to an amide group of the formula —C(═O)NH2. “Alkylcarbamoyl” refers to a R′RN—C(═O)— group wherein one of R and R′ is hydrogen and the other of R and R′ is alkyl and/or substituted alkyl as previously described. “Dialkylcarbamoyl” refers to a R′RN—C(═O)— group wherein each of R and R′ is independently alkyl and/or substituted alkyl as previously described.
  • The term carbonyldioxyl, as used herein, refers to a carbonate group of the formula —O—C(═O)—OR.
  • “Acyloxyl” refers to an acyl-O— group wherein acyl is as previously described.
  • The term “amino” refers to the —NH2 group and also refers to a nitrogen containing group as is known in the art derived from ammonia by the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals by organic radicals. For example, the terms “acylamino” and “alkylamino” refer to specific N-substituted organic radicals with acyl and alkyl substituent groups respectively.
  • An “aminoalkyl” as used herein refers to an amino group covalently bound to an alkylene linker. More particularly, the terms alkylamino, dialkylamino, and trialkylamino as used herein refer to one, two, or three, respectively, alkyl groups, as previously defined, attached to the parent molecular moiety through a nitrogen atom. The term alkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NHR′ wherein R′ is an alkyl group, as previously defined; whereas the term dialkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NR′R″, wherein R′ and R″ are each independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl groups. The term trialkylamino refers to a group having the structure —NR′R″R′″, wherein R′, R″, and R′″ are each independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl groups. Additionally, R′, R″, and/or R′″ taken together may optionally be —(CH2)k— where k is an integer from 2 to 6. Examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino, dimethylamino, ethylamino, diethylamino, diethylaminocarbonyl, methylethylamino, isopropylamino, piperidino, trimethylamino, and propylamino.
  • The amino group is —NR′R″, wherein R′ and R″ are typically selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • The terms alkylthioether and thioalkoxyl refer to a saturated (i.e., alkyl-S—) or unsaturated (i.e., alkenyl-S— and alkynyl-S—) group attached to the parent molecular moiety through a sulfur atom. Examples of thioalkoxyl moieties include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.
  • “Acylamino” refers to an acyl-NH— group wherein acyl is as previously described. “Aroylamino” refers to an aroyl-NH— group wherein aroyl is as previously described.
  • The term “carbonyl” refers to the —C(═O)— group, and can include an aldehyde group represented by the general formula R—C(═O)H.
  • The term “carboxyl” refers to the —COOH group. Such groups also are referred to herein as a “carboxylic acid” moiety.
  • The terms “halo,” “halide,” or “halogen” as used herein refer to fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo groups. Additionally, terms such as “haloalkyl,” are meant to include monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl. For example, the term “halo(C1-C4)alkyl” is mean to include, but not be limited to, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, and the like.
  • The term “hydroxyl” refers to the —OH group.
  • The term “hydroxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with an —OH group.
  • The term “mercapto” refers to the —SH group.
  • The term “oxo” as used herein means an oxygen atom that is double bonded to a carbon atom or to another element.
  • The term “nitro” refers to the —NO2 group.
  • The term “thio” refers to a compound described previously herein wherein a carbon or oxygen atom is replaced by a sulfur atom.
  • The term “sulfate” refers to the —SO4 group.
  • The term thiohydroxyl or thiol, as used herein, refers to a group of the formula —SH.
  • More particularly, the term “sulfide” refers to compound having a group of the formula —SR.
  • The term “sulfone” refers to compound having a sulfonyl group —S(O2)R.
  • The term “sulfoxide” refers to a compound having a sulfinyl group —S(O)R
  • The term ureido refers to a urea group of the formula —NH—CO—NH2.
  • Throughout the specification and claims, a given chemical formula or name shall encompass all tautomers, congeners, and optical- and stereoisomers, as well as racemic mixtures where such isomers and mixtures exist.
  • Certain compounds of the present disclosure may possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical or chiral centers) or double bonds; the enantiomers, racemates, diastereomers, tautomers, geometric isomers, stereoisometric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)-or (S)- or, as D- or L- for amino acids, and individual isomers are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure. The compounds of the present disclosure do not include those which are known in art to be too unstable to synthesize and/or isolate. The present disclosure is meant to include compounds in racemic, scalemic, and optically pure forms. Optically active (R)- and (S)-, or D- and L-isomers may be prepared using chiral synthons or chiral reagents, or resolved using conventional techniques. When the compounds described herein contain olefenic bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers. Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include all stereochemical forms of the structure; i.e., the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric and diastereomeric mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the disclosure.
  • It will be apparent to one skilled in the art that certain compounds of this disclosure may exist in tautomeric forms, all such tautomeric forms of the compounds being within the scope of the disclosure. The term “tautomer,” as used herein, refers to one of two or more structural isomers which exist in equilibrium and which are readily converted from one isomeric form to another.
  • Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds which differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures with the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by 13C- or 14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this disclosure.
  • The compounds of the present disclosure may also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of atoms that constitute such compounds. For example, the compounds may be radiolabeled with radioactive isotopes, such as for example iodine-125 (125I) or astatine-211 (211At). All isotopic variations of the compounds of the present disclosure, whether radioactive or not, are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • The compounds of the present disclosure may exist as salts. The present disclosure includes such salts. Examples of applicable salt forms include hydrochlorides, hydrobromides, sulfates, methanesulfonates, nitrates, maleates, acetates, citrates, fumarates, tartrates (e.g. (+)-tartrates, (−)-tartrates or mixtures thereof including racemic mixtures, succinates, benzoates and salts with amino acids such as glutamic acid. These salts may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in art.
  • Also included are base addition salts such as sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, organic amino, or magnesium salt, or a similar salt. When compounds of the present disclosure contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent or by ion exchange. Examples of acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, maleic, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, lactic, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like. Certain specific compounds of the present disclosure contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.
  • The neutral forms of the compounds may be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner. The parent form of the compound differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents.
  • Certain compounds of the present disclosure can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are encompassed within the scope of the present disclosure. Certain compounds of the present disclosure may exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present disclosure and are intended to be within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • In addition to salt forms, the present disclosure provides compounds, which are in a prodrug form. Prodrugs of the compounds described herein are those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present disclosure. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present disclosure by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the present disclosure when placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
  • The term “protecting group” refers to chemical moieties that block some or all reactive moieties of a compound and prevent such moieties from participating in chemical reactions until the protective group is removed, for example, those moieties listed and described in T. W. Greene, P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd ed. John Wiley & Sons (1999). It may be advantageous, where different protecting groups are employed, that each (different) protective group be removable by a different means. Protective groups that are cleaved under totally disparate reaction conditions allow differential removal of such protecting groups. For example, protective groups can be removed by acid, base, and hydrogenolysis. Groups such as trityl, dimethoxytrityl, acetal and tert-butyldimethylsilyl are acid labile and may be used to protect carboxy and hydroxy reactive moieties in the presence of amino groups protected with Cbz groups, which are removable by hydrogenolysis, and Fmoc groups, which are base labile. Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may be blocked with base labile groups such as, without limitation, methyl, ethyl, and acetyl in the presence of amines blocked with acid labile groups such as tert-butyl carbamate or with carbamates that are both acid and base stable but hydrolytically removable.
  • Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may also be blocked with hydrolytically removable protective groups such as the benzyl group, while amine groups capable of hydrogen bonding with acids may be blocked with base labile groups such as Fmoc. Carboxylic acid reactive moieties may be blocked with oxidatively-removable protective groups such as 2,4-dimethoxybenzyl, while co-existing amino groups may be blocked with fluoride labile silyl carbamates.
  • Allyl blocking groups are useful in the presence of acid- and base-protecting groups since the former are stable and can be subsequently removed by metal or pi-acid catalysts. For example, an allyl-blocked carboxylic acid can be deprotected with a palladium(O)— catalyzed reaction in the presence of acid labile t-butyl carbamate or base-labile acetate amine protecting groups. Yet another form of protecting group is a resin to which a compound or intermediate may be attached. As long as the residue is attached to the resin, that functional group is blocked and cannot react. Once released from the resin, the functional group is available to react.
  • Typical blocking/protecting groups include, but are not limited to the following moieties:
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00065
  • Further, as used herein, a “protecting group” is a chemical substituent which can be selectively removed by readily available reagents which do not attack the regenerated functional group or other functional groups in the molecule. Suitable protecting groups are known in the art and continue to be developed. Suitable protecting groups may be found, for example in Wutz et al. (“Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Fourth Edition,” Wiley-Interscience, 2007). Protecting groups for protection of the carboxyl group, as described by Wutz et al. (pages 533-643), are used in certain embodiments. In some embodiments, the protecting group is removable by treatment with acid. Specific examples of protecting groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), tertiary butyl (t-Bu), methoxymethyl (MOM), methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), tetrahydrofuranyl (THF), benzyloxymethyl (BOM), trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), and triphenylmethyl (trityl, Tr). Persons skilled in the art will recognize appropriate situations in which protecting groups are required and will be able to select an appropriate protecting group for use in a particular circumstance.
  • The term “metal ion” as used herein refers to elements of the periodic table that are metallic and that are positively charged as a result of having fewer electrons in the valence shell than is present for the neutral metallic element. Metals that are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter include metals capable of forming pharmaceutically acceptable compositions. Useful metals include, but are not limited to, Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, and Ba. One of skill in the art will appreciate that the metals described above can each adopt several different oxidation states. In some instances, the most stable oxidation state is formed, but other oxidation states are useful in the presently disclosed subject matter.
  • Following long-standing patent law convention, the terms “a,” “an,” and “the” refer to “one or more” when used in this application, including the claims. Thus, for example, reference to “a subject” includes a plurality of subjects, unless the context clearly is to the contrary (e.g., a plurality of subjects), and so forth.
  • Throughout this specification and the claims, the terms “comprise,” “comprises,” and “comprising” are used in a non-exclusive sense, except where the context requires otherwise. Likewise, the term “include” and its grammatical variants are intended to be non-limiting, such that recitation of items in a list is not to the exclusion of other like items that can be substituted or added to the listed items.
  • For the purposes of this specification and appended claims, unless otherwise indicated, all numbers expressing amounts, sizes, dimensions, proportions, shapes, formulations, parameters, percentages, quantities, characteristics, and other numerical values used in the specification and claims, are to be understood as being modified in all instances by the term “about” even though the term “about” may not expressly appear with the value, amount or range. Accordingly, unless indicated to the contrary, the numerical parameters set forth in the following specification and attached claims are not and need not be exact, but may be approximate and/or larger or smaller as desired, reflecting tolerances, conversion factors, rounding off, measurement error and the like, and other factors known to those of skill in the art depending on the desired properties sought to be obtained by the presently disclosed subject matter. For example, the term “about,” when referring to a value can be meant to encompass variations of, in some embodiments, ±100% in some embodiments ±50%, in some embodiments ±20%, in some embodiments ±10%, in some embodiments ±5%, in some embodiments ±1%, in some embodiments ±0.5%, and in some embodiments ±0.1% from the specified amount, as such variations are appropriate to perform the disclosed methods or employ the disclosed compositions.
  • Further, the term “about” when used in connection with one or more numbers or numerical ranges, should be understood to refer to all such numbers, including all numbers in a range and modifies that range by extending the boundaries above and below the numerical values set forth. The recitation of numerical ranges by endpoints includes all numbers, e.g., whole integers, including fractions thereof, subsumed within that range (for example, the recitation of 1 to 5 includes 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, as well as fractions thereof, e.g., 1.5, 2.25, 3.75, 4.1, and the like) and any range within that range.
  • In the examples below the following terms are intended to have the following meaning: ACN: acetonitrile, DCM: Dichloromethane, DIPEA: N,N-Diisopropylethylamine, DMF: Dimethylformamide, HPLC: High Performance Liquid Chromatography, HRMS: High Resolution Mass Spectrometry, LRMS: Low Resolution Mass Spectrometry, NCS: N-Chlorosuccinimide, NHS: N-Hydroxysuccinimide, NMR: nuclear magnetic resonance, PMB: p-methoxybenzyl, RT: room temperature, TEA: Triethylamine, TFA: Trifluoroacetic acid, and TSTU: O—(N-Succinimidyl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate.
    • EXAMPLES
  • The following Examples have been included to provide guidance to one of ordinary skill in the art for practicing representative embodiments of the presently disclosed subject matter. In light of the present disclosure and the general level of skill in the art, those of skill can appreciate that the following Examples are intended to be exemplary only and that numerous changes, modifications, and alterations can be employed without departing from the scope of the presently disclosed subject matter. The synthetic descriptions and specific examples that follow are only intended for the purposes of illustration, and are not to be construed as limiting in any manner to make compounds of the disclosure by other methods.
    • Example 1 General Methods
  • Chemistry. All chemicals and solvents were purchased from either Sigma-Aldrich (Milwaukee, WI) or Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, PA). The N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) esters of DyLight 800 was purchased from Thermo Fisher Scientific (Rockford, IL). ESI mass spectra were obtained on a Bruker Esquire 3000 plus system (Billerica, MA). High-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) purifications were performed on a Varian Prostar System (Varian Medical Systems, Palo Alto, CA).
  • Cell Lines and Tumor Models. PSMA+ PC3 PIP and PSMA− PC3 flu cell lines were obtained from Dr. Warren Heston (Cleveland Clinic). Cells were grown to 80-90% confluence in a single passage before trypsinization and formulation in Hank's balanced salt solution (HBSS, Sigma, St. Louis, MO) for implantation into mice. Animal studies were carried out in compliance with guidelines related to the conduct of animal experiments of the Johns Hopkins Animal Care and Use Committee. For optical imaging studies and ex-vivo biodistribution, male NOD-SCID mice (JHU, in house colony) were implanted subcutaneously with 1×106 PSMA+ PC3 PIP and PSMA− PC3 flu cells in opposite flanks. Mice were imaged when the tumor xenografts reached 3-5 mm in diameter.
  • In Vivo Imaging and Ex Vivo Biodistribution. After image acquisition at baseline (pre-injection), mouse was injected intravenously with 1 nmol of DyLight800-3 and images were acquired at 1 h, 2 h, 4 h and 24 h time points using a Pearl Impulse Imager (LI-COR Biosciences). Following the 24 h image the mouse was sacrificed by cervical dislocation and tumor, muscle, liver, spleen, kidneys and intestine were collected and assembled on a petri dish for image acquisition. All images were scaled to the same intensity for direct comparison. FIG. 1 shows the images at 24 hours postinjection of 1 nmol of DyLight800-3 in mouse with PSMA+ PC3 PIP and PSMA− PC3 flu tumors. Both whole body and ex vivo organ imaging clearly demonstrated PSMA+ PC3 PIP tumor uptake and little uptake in PSMA− PC3 flu tumor, indicating target selectivity in vivo.
    • Example 2 Synthesis Methods
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00066
  • Synthesis of DyLight800-3: To a solution of compound 3, Chen et al., 2009, (0.5 mg, 0.7 μmol) in DMSO (0.1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.010 mL, 57.4 μmol), followed by NHS ester of DyLight800 (0.3 mg, 0.29 μmol). After 1 h at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Phenomenex Luna C18 10μ, 250×4.6 mm; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 min=5% B, 5 min=5% B, 45 min=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.3 mg (70%) of DyLight800-3. ESI-Mass calcd for C71H94N7O2S3 [M−H]− 1492.6, found 1492.4 [M−H]−.
    • Example 3
  • General
  • All reagents and solvents were purchased from either Sigma-Aldrich (Milwaukee, WI) or Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, PA). 2-{3-[5-[7-(2,5-Dioxo-pyrrolidin-1-yloxycarbonyl)-heptanoylamino]-1-(4-methoxy-benzyloxycarbonyl)-pentyl]-ureido}-pentanedioic acid bis-(4-methoxy-benzyl) ester (1) was prepared according to (Banerjee et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). H-Lys(Boc)-OBu-HCl was purchased from Chem-Impex International (Wood Dale, IL). The N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) ester of IRDye 800CW was purchased from LI-COR Biosciences (Lincoln, NE). 1H NMR spectra were obtained on a Bruker Avance 400 mHz Spectrometer. ESI mass spectra were obtained on a Bruker Esquire 3000 plus system. Purification by high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) was performed on a Varian Prostar System (Varian Medical Systems, Palo Alto, CA).
    • YC-27
  • Compound YC-27 was prepared according the scheme shown below.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00067
  • Trifluoroacetate salt of 2-(3-{5-[7-(5-amino-1-carboxy-pentylcarbamoyl)-heptanoylamino]-1-carboxy-pentyl}-ureido)-pentanedioc add (YC-VIII-24). To a solution of 1 (0.065 g, 0.020 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) was added triethylamine (0.040 mL, 0.285 mmol), followed by H-Lys(Boc)-OBu-HCl (0.028 g, 0.083 mmol). After stirring for 2 h at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated on a rotary evaporator. A solution of TFA/CH2Cl2 1:1 (2 mL) was then added to the residue and stirred for 1 h at room temperature. The crude material was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18, 10, 250×10 mm; retention time, 15 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 min=5% B, 25 min=25% B; flow rate, 4 mL/min) to afford 0.032 g (66%) of YC-VIII-24. 1H NMR (400 MHz, D2O) δ4.24-4.28 (m, 1H), 4.17-4.20 (m, 1H), 4.08-4.12 (m, 1H), 3.08-3.12 (m, 2H), 2.88-2.92 (m, 2H), 2.41-2.44 (m, 2H), 2.19-2.21 (m, 2H), 2.05-2.16 (m, 3H), 1.57-1.93 (m, 7H), 1.21-1.50 (m, 10H), 1.21 (m, 4H). ESI-Mass calcd for C2H46N5O11 [M]+ 604.3, found 604.0.
  • YC-27. To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (0.3 mg, 0.43 μmol) in DMSO (0.1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.002 mL, 11.4 μmol), followed by the NHS ester of IRDye 800CW (0.3 mg, 0.26 μmol). After stirring for YC-VIII-24 for 2 h at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 22 min, mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 min=0% B, 5 min=0% B, 45 min=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.3 mg (72%) of YC-27. ESI-Mass caled for C72H97N7O25S4 [M]+ 1587.5, found 794.3 [M+H]2+, 1587.6 [M]+.
    • Synthesis of Precursor YC-VI-54
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00068
  • To a solution of Lys-Urea-Glu (0.103 g, 0.121 mmol, Banerjee et al J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 4507-4517, 2008) in DMF (2 mL) was added Boc-NH-PEG-COOH (0.060 g, 0.135 mmol) and TBTU (0.040 g, 0.125 mmol), followed by N,N′-diisopropylethylamine (0.042 mL, 0.241 mmol). After stirring overnight at room temperature, the solvent was evaporated on a rotary evaporator. The crude material was purified by a silica column using methanol/methylene chloride (5:95) to afford 0.101 g (0.109 mmol, 90%) of YC-VI-53, which was dissolved in a solution of 3% anisole in TFA (1 mL). The mixture was reacted at room temperature for 10 min, then concentrated on a rotary evaporator. The crude material was purified by HPLC (Econosphere C18 10u, 250×10 mm, H2O/CH3CN/TFA (92/8/0.1), 4 mL/min, Compound YC-VI-54 eluting at 11 min) to afford 0.035 g (57%) of compound YC-VI-54. 1H NMR (400 MHz, D2O) 84.17-4.21 (m, 1H), 4.10-4.13 (m, 1H), 4.00 (s, 2H), 3.67-3.71 (m, 6H), 3.14-3.20 (m, 4H), 2.43-2.46 (m, 2H), 2.08-2.13 (m, 1H), 1.87-1.93 (m, 1H), 1.76-1.79 (m, 1H), 1.63-1.67 (m, 1H), 1.45-1.50 (m, 2H), 1.33-1.40 (m, 2H). ESI-Mass calcd for C18H33N4O10 [M]+ 465.2, found 465.2.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00069
  • To a solution of compound YC-VI-54 (0.3 mg, 53 μmol) in DMSO (0.05 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.002 mL, 11.4 μmol), followed by NHS ester of IRDye 800RS (0.2 mg, 0.21 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 28 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.2 mg (75%) of compound YC-VIII-11. ESI-Mass calcd for C64H84N6O18S2 [M]+ 1288.5, found 1288.9.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00070
  • To a solution of compound YC-VI-54 (0.3 mg, 53 μmol) in DMSO (0.05 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.002 mL, 11.4 μmol), followed by NHS ester of IRDye800CW (0.2 mg, 0.17 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 22 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.2 mg (80%) of compound YC-VIII-12. ESI-Mass calcd for C64H84N6O24S4 [M]+ 1448.4, found 1448.7.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00071
  • To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (prepared as described previously for YC-27) (0.3 mg, 0.42 μmol) in DMSO (0.1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.002 mL, 11.5 μmol), followed by NHS ester of IRDye 800RS (0.3 mg, 0.31 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 27 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.3 mg (67%) of compound YC-VIII-28. ESI-Mass calcd for C72H97N7O19S2 [M]+ 1427.6, found 714.4 [M+H]2+, 1427.8 [M]+.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00072
  • To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (0.5 mg, 0.70 μmol) in DMSO (0.1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.005 mL, 28.7 μmol), followed by NHS ester of BODIPY 650/665-X (0.3 mg, 0.47 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 28 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.4 mg (75%) of compound YC-VIII-30. ESI-Mass calcd for C55H73BF2N9O14 [M+H]+ 1132.5, found 1132.0.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00073
  • To a solution of YC-VI-54 (0.5 mg, 0.70 μmol) in DMSO (0.1 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.005 mL, 28.7 μmol), followed by NHS ester of BODIPY 650/665-X (0.3 mg, 0.47 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 29 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.4 mg (86%) of compound YC-VIII-31. ESI-Mass calcd for C47H59BF2N8O13 [M]+ 992.4, found 992.9.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00074
  • To a solution of Lys-Urea-Glu (4.0 mg, 9.6 μmol) in DMF (0.5 mL) was added triethylamine (0.01 mL, 71.7 μmol), followed by Marina Blue-NHS ester (1.8 mg, 4.9 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 10μ, 250×10 mm; retention time, 14 min; mobile phase, H2O/CH3CN/TFA=85/15/0.1; flow rate, 4 mL/min) to afford 2.5 mg (89%) of compound YC-VIII-41. 1H NMR (400 MHz, D2O) δ 7.40 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 4.23-4.31 (m, 1H), 4.15-4.19 (m, 1H), 3.64 (s, 2H), 3.19-3.23 (m, 2H), 2.49-2.53 (m, 2H), 2.39 (s, 3H), 2.06-2.17 (m, 1H), 1.95-1.99 (m, 1H), 1.83-1.90 (m, 1H), 1.72-1.80 (m, 1H), 1.52-1.55 (m, 2H), 1.40-1.45 (m, 2H). ESI-Mass calcd for C24H28F2N3O11 [M+H]+ 572.2, found 571.8.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00075
  • To a solution of Lys-Urea-Glu (4.0 mg, 9.6 μmol) in DMSO (0.5 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.020 mL, 114.8 μmol), followed by 4-[2-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-vinyl]-1-(3-isothiocyanato-propyl)-pyridium (3 mg, 7.4 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 10μ, 250×10 mm; retention time, 13 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=10% B, 20 mins=60% B; flow rate, 4 mL/min) to afford 1.3 mg (24%) of compound YC-VIII-52. ESI-Mass calcd for C31H43N6O7S [M]+ 643.3, found 642.9.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00076
  • To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (3.0 mg, 4.2 μmol) in DMSO (0.5 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.020 mL, 114.8 μmol), followed by 4-[2-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-vinyl]-1-(3-isothiocyanato-propyl)-pyridium (2 mg, 4.9 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 15 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 2 mg (47%) of compound YC-VIII-74. ESI-Mass calcd for C45H67N8O11S [M]+ 927.5, found 927.0.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00077
  • To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (5.0 mg, 7.0 μmol) in DMF (1 mL) was added N,N-triethylamine (0.020 mL, 143.5 μmol), followed by NHS ester of 5-(and-6)-carboxynaphthofluorescein (4.0 mg, 7.0 μmol). After 1 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 10μ, 250×10 mm; retention time, minor product at 17 min, major product at 20 min); mobile phase, H2O/CH3CN/TFA=70/30/0.1; flow rate, 4 mL/min) to afford 0.3 mg of minor and 2.2 mg of major product (two isomers of YC-VIII-63). ESI-Mass calcd for C55H59N5O17 [M]+ 1061.4, found 1061.6 (for both minor and major product).
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00078
  • To a solution of Lys-Urea-Glu (0.2 mg, 0.48 μmol) in DMSO (0.05 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.002 mL, 11.5 μmol), followed by NHS ester of IRDye 800RS (0.2 mg, 0.21 μmol). After 2 hour at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 23 min; mobile phase, A=0.1% TFA in H2O, B=0.1% TFA in CH3CN; gradient, 0 mins=0% B, 5 mins=0% B, 45 mins=100% B; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 0.2 mg (84%) of compound YC-IX-92. ESI-Mass calcd for C58H73N5O15S2[M]+ 1143.5, found 572.5 [M+H]2+, 1144.0 [M]+.
    • Characterization—Fluorescence
  • Fluorescence spectra were recorded using a Varian Cary Eclipse fluorescence spectrophotometer (Varian Medical Systems) with excitation from a Xenon are lamp. YC-27 was dissolved in water. All of the fluorescence measurements were performed in aqueous solution under ambient conditions. The fluorescence quantum yield of YC-27 was measured using an aqueous solution of ICG (Φ=0.016 (Sevick-Muraca et al., Photochem. Photobiol., vol. 66, pp. 55-64, 1997), excitation wavelength at 775 nm) as the standard (FIG. 2 ). The fluorescence intensity data were collected in the spectral region 780-900 nm over which quantum yield was integrated. Time-resolved intensity decays were recorded using a PicoQuant Fluotime 100 time-correlated single-photon counting (TCSPC) fluorescence lifetime spectrometer (PicoQuant, Berlin, DE). The excitation was obtained using a pulsed laser diode (PicoQuant PDL800-B) with a 20 MHz repetition rate. The fluorescence intensity decay of YC-27 was analyzed in terms of the single-exponential decay using the PicoQuant Fluofit 4.1 software with deconvolution of the instrument response function and nonlinear least squares fitting. The goodness-of-fit was determined by the χ2 value.
  • The electronic spectrum of YC-27 exhibited an absorbance maximum at 774 nm with an extinction coefficient of 158,900 M−1. Upon excitation, YC-27 provided intense fluorescence with an emission maximum at 792 nm and a fluorescence lifetime of 443 psec in aqueous solution (FIG. 3 ). Using an excitation wavelength of 775 nm, YC-27 demonstrated a fluorescence quantum yield of 0.053 in aqueous solution relative to ICG, which demonstrated a quantum yield of 0.016 (FIG. 2 ) (Sevick-Muraca et al., Photochem. Photobiol., vol. 66, pp. 55-64, 1997), attesting to the efficiency of this IRDye 800CW-based compound. That is significant because ICG has been used previously for intraoperative tumor mapping (K. Gotoh, T. Yamada, O. Ishikawa, H. Takahashi, H. Eguchi, M. Yano, H. Ohigashi, Y. Tomita, Y. Miyamoto, and S. Imaoka, A novel image-guided surgery of hepatocellular carcinoma by indocyanine green fluorescence imaging navigation. J. Surg. Oncol., 2009).
    • In Vitro NAALADase Activity
  • PSMA inhibitory activity of YC-27 was determined using a fluorescence-based assay according to a previously reported procedure (Chen et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 7933-7943, 2008). Briefly, lysates of LNCaP cell extracts (25 μL) were incubated with the inhibitor (12.5 μL) in the presence of 4 μM N-acetylaspartylglutamate (NAAG) (12.5 μL) for 120 min. The amount of glutamate released by NAAG hydrolysis was measured by incubation with a working solution (50 μL) of the Amplex Red Glutamic Acid Kit (Molecular Probes Inc., Eugene, OR) for 60 min. Fluorescence was measured with a VICTOR3V multilabel plate reader (Perkin Elmer Inc., Waltham, MA) with excitation at 530 nm and emission at 560 nm. Inhibition curves were determined using semi-log plots, and IC50 values were determined at the concentration at which enzyme activity was inhibited by 50%. Assays were performed in triplicate. Enzyme inhibitory constants (Ki values) were generated using the Cheng-Prusoff conversion. Data analysis was performed using GraphPad Prism version 4.00 for Windows (GraphPad Software, San Diego, California).
  • This assay is free from the interference of IRDye 800CW because the excitation/emission maxima of IRDye 800CW are remote from those of resorufin (λex=563 nm, λem=587 nm), which provides the fluorescent readout in the assay. The Ki value of YC-27 was 0.37 nM with 95% confidence intervals from 0.18 nM to 0.79 nM. Under the same experimental conditions, the Ki value of the known PSMA inhibitor ZJ-43 (Zhou et al., Nat. Rev. Drug Discov., vol. 4, pp. 1015-1026, 2005) was 2.1 nM, indicating the high inhibitory capacity of YC-27. The inhibition curve of YC-27, which is expressed with respect to the amount of glutamate released from hydrolysis of NAAG, is shown in FIG. 4 .
    • Biodistribution and Imaging
  • Cell Culture and Animal Models. Both PSMA-expressing (PSMA+ PC3-PIP) and non-expressing (PSMA− PC3-flu) prostate cancer cell lines (Chang et al, Cancer Res., vol. 59, pp. 3192-3198, 1999) were grown in RPMI 1640 medium (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA) containing 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) (Invitrogen) and 1% Pen-Strep (Biofluids, Camarillo, CA). All cell cultures were maintained in 5% carbon dioxide (CO2), at 37.0° C. in a humidified incubator. Animal studies were undertaken in compliance with the regulations of the Johns Hopkins Animal Care and Use Committee. Six- to eight-week-old male, non-obese diabetic (NOD)/severe-combined immunodeficient (SCID) mice (Charles River Laboratories, Wilmington, MA) were implanted subcutaneously (s.c.) with PC3-PIP and PC3-flu cells (2×106 in 100 □L of Matrigel) at the forward left and right flanks, respectively. Mice were imaged or used in ex vivo biodistribution assays when the xenografts reached 5 to 7 mm in diameter.
  • In vivo Imaging and Ex vivo Biodistribution. Mouse #1 was injected with 10 nmol and mouse #2 with 1 nmol of YC-27 in 200 μL of PBS intravenously (i.v.) via the lateral tail vein. Mouse #3 was injected with 1 nmol of YC-27 and also co-injected with 1 □mol of the known PSMA inhibitor 2-{3-[1-carboxy-5-(4-iodo-benzoylamino)-pentyl]-ureido}-pentanedioic acid (DCIBzL) (Chen et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 7933-7943, 2008; Barinka et al., J. Med. Chem. vol. 51, pp. 7737-7743, 2008) in 200 μL of PBS i.v. to assess for PSMA binding specificity. Images were acquired at an array of post-injection (p.i.) time points starting at 10 min p.i. using a dedicated small animal optical imaging instrument, the Pearl Imager (LI-COR Biosciences). The Pearl Imager uses diffusive lasers optimized for IRDye 800CW. The instrument employs a CCD camera with a field-of-view of 11.2 cm×8.4 cm at the surface of the imaging bed. The scan time was less than 30 sec to complete white light, 700 nm channel and 800 nm channel image acquisition. Images are displayed using a pseudocolor output with corresponding scale. All images were acquired at the same parameter settings and are scaled to the same maximum values. Imaging bed temperature was adjusted to 37° C. Animals received inhalational anesthesia (isoflurane) through a nose cone attached to the imaging bed. Animals were sacrificed by cervical dislocation for ex vivo imaging studies at the end of acquisition of the in vivo images. Ex vivo images were acquired first by midline surgical laparotomy and then again by harvesting liver, spleen, stomach, small intestine, kidneys, urinary bladder, PC3-PIP and PC3-flu tumors and displaying them individually on plastic Petri dishes. Estimates of signal output were provided by drawing three circular regions of interest within each tumor and determining the average signal (arbitrary units)/area using the manufacturer's software.
  • FIG. 5A-FIG. 5O (mouse #1) depict the pharmacokinetic behavior of YC-27 in vivo. In this experiment 10 nmol of YC-27 was administered intravenously and the animal was imaged repeatedly over a three day period. Although difficult to quantify as these are planar images, one can see clearly increased uptake in the PSMA+ PC3-PIP tumor relative to the control (PSMA-negative) PC3-flu tumor at 18.5 h p.i. through 70.5 h p.i. (FIG. 5C through FIG. 5M). Using quantitative real time polymerase chain reaction (qRT-PCR) we measured the relative amounts of PSMA mRNA expression in extracts of the tumors in mice #1-3, and confirmed that PC3-PIP tumors (left flank) expressed PSMA mRNA at levels several million times higher than PC3-flu tumors (right flank) (data not shown). Panels 5L and 5M show emission from the intact, living, unshaven animal, while panels 5N and 5O are postmortem studies with organs exposed. Note that in 5L one can barely discern the kidneys, a known target site for PSMA (Tasch et al., Crit. Rev. Immunol., vol. 21, pp. 249-261, 2001; Pomper et al., Mol. Imaging, vol. 1, pp. 96-101, 2002; Kinoshita et al., World J. Surg., vol. 30, pp. 628-636, 2006), while the kidneys are clearly visible in 5O when exposed. A portion of that renal light emission may be due to clearance of this relatively hydrophilic compound. The estimated target-to-nontarget ratio (PC-3 PIP vs. PC-3 flu light output) was 10 when comparing the tumors from panel M (70.5 h p.i.).
  • The experiment in FIG. 6A-FIG. 6T was performed with 10-fold less YC-27 administered than in the previous experiment. Despite reducing the concentration of YC-27, PSMA+ PC3-PIP tumor could be seen clearly at one day p.i. (FIG. 6A-FIG. 6J, mouse #2, Left Panels). DCIBzL, a known, high-affinity PSMA inhibitor, was co-administered with YC-27 as a test of binding specificity (FIG. 6K-FIG. 6T, mouse #3, Right Panels). Nearly all of the light emission from target tumor, as well as kidneys, was blocked, demonstrating the specificity of this compound for PSMA in vivo. The estimated target-to-nontarget ratio (PC-3 PIP vs. PC-3 flu light output) was 26 when comparing the tumors from panel F (20.5 h p.i.). By administering 1 nmol to this ˜25 g mouse, we have realized the high sensitivity of in vivo optical imaging, rivaling that of the radiopharmaceutical-based techniques. For example, 1 nmol converts to 1.6 □g injected. If we synthesized a similar compound labeled with 18F or other radionuclide at 1,000 mCi/□mol (37 GBq/□mol), and administered a standard dose of 200 □Ci (7.4 MBq) to a mouse, we would be injecting 0.3 □g.
  • Interestingly, in mouse #1, which received 10 nmol of YC-27, we observed a small degree of non-specific uptake at the 23 h time point, manifested as uptake within PSMA-negative PC3-flu tumors. That finding could be due to enhanced permeability and retention of YC-27. No non-specific uptake/retention was observed at a similar, 20.5 h, time point in mouse #2, which received a 10-fold lower dose. That finding suggests the need for further optimization of dose and timing for in vivo applications.
    • Discussion
  • A wide variety of low molecular weight PSMA-based imaging agents have been synthesized, including those using the urea scaffold (Banerjee et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008; Chen et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 7933-7943, 2008; Zhou et al., Nat. Rev. Drug Discov., vol. 4, pp. 1015-1026, 2005; Pomper et al., Mol. Imaging, vol. 1, pp. 96-101, 2002; Foss et al., Clin. Cancer Res., vol. 11, pp. 4022-4028, 2005; Humblet et al., Mol. Imaging, vol. 4, 448-462, 2005; Misra et al., J. Nucl. Med., vol. 48, pp. 1379-1389, 2007; Mease et al., Clin. Cancer Res., vol. 14, pp. 3036-3043, 2008; Liu et al., Prostate, vol. 68, pp. 955-964, 2008; Humblet et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 52, pp. 544-550, 2009; Kularatne et al., Mol. Pharm., vol. 6, pp. 790-800, 2009; Hillier et al., Cancer Res., vol. 69, pp. 6932-6940, 2009). Those compounds have primarily been radiopharmaceuticals, but optical agents exist. In two separate studies Humblet et al. reported the synthesis of mono- and polyvalent NIR fluorescent phosphonate derivatives for imaging PSMA, but little accumulation in PSMA-expressing tumors was evident in the former study (Humblet et al., Mol. Imaging, vol. 4, pp. 448-462, 2005) while no in vivo results were reported in the latter (Humblet et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 52, pp. 544-550, 2009). Liu et al have also synthesized fluorescent phosphonate derivatives and have demonstrated their PSMA-binding specificity and intracellular localization in vitro (Liu et al., Prostate, vol. 68, pp. 955-964, 2008). Recently Kularatne et al. have synthesized fluorescent (fluorescein and rhodamine) urea derivatives that demonstrate PSMA migration to endosomes (Kularatne et al., Mol. Pharm., vol. 6, pp. 790-800, 2009). We arrived at YC-27 based on structure-activity relationships developed for PSMA-binding ureas, which were focused on improving pharmacokinetics for use in vivo by optimization of the linker-chelate complex (Banerjee et al., J. Med. Chem., vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). Calculated hydrophobicity values (Ghose et al., J. Phys. Chem. A, vol. 102, pp. 3762-3772, 1998) suggest that YC-27 should be considerably more hydrophobic (A Log D=5.96) than radiopharmaceuticals such as [125I]DCIBzL (A Log D=1.19), perhaps accounting for its long tumor retention, which is desirable for an optical imaging agent intended for intraoperative use. We confirmed greater hydrophobicity of YC-27 relative to DCIBzL through reverse-phase HPLC (data not shown)
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00079
  • To a solution of YC-VIII-24 (prepared as described in Example 5) (1.5 mg, 0.21 □mol) in DMF (1 mL) was added triethylamine (0.005 mL, 35.9 μmol), followed by fluorescein isothiocyanate isomer 1 (1 mg, 2.57 μmol). After 2 hours at room temperature, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC (column, Econosphere C18 5μ, 150×4.6 mm; retention time, 15 min; mobile phase, H2O/CH3CN/TFA=75/25/0.1; flow rate, 1 mL/min) to afford 1.5 mg (72%) of compound YC-VIII-36. ESI-Mass calcd for C47H57N6O16S [M+H]+ 993.4, found 992.8.
    • Cell Labeling
  • PSMA positive PIP cells, and PSMA negative FLU cells were treated with compound YC-VIII-36 (40 nM) and 4′,6-diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI, blue). FIG. 7 shows fluorescence of cells expressing PSMA (green fluorescence, top left). PIP and FLU cells were treated with both YC-VIII-36 and PSMA inhibitor PMPA (5 μM), showing inhibition of cellular fluorescence by PMPA (FIG. 7 , bottom).
  • FIG. 8 shows PC3-PIP cells treated with DAPI (blue) and varying concentrations of YC-VIII-36 (green).
  • FIG. 9 shows time dependent internalization of YC-VIII-36 into PC3-PIP cells treated with YC-VIII-36 (green) and DAPI (blue). The time dependent internalization study was done as described (Liu et al., Prostate vol. 68, pp. 955-964, 2008) with appropriate modifications. Briefly, PC3-PIP cells were seeded as above. The cells were first pre-chilled by incubating with ice cold complete growth media and then incubated with ice cold complete growth media containing 500 nM of compound YC-VIII-36 at 40 C for 1 hr. After 1 hr of incubation the excess compound was removed by washing the wells twice with ice-cold complete growth media and then the wells were replenished with pre-warmed complete growth media. The chamber slides containing cells were incubated for 10 min, 30 min, 60 min and 180 min at 37° C. in a humidified incubator.
    • In Vivo Imaging
  • FIG. 10 shows titration and detection of varying amounts of YC-VIII-36 injected subcutaneously into a nude mouse. (IVIS spectrum with 10 second exposure followed by spectral unmixing).
  • FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 (top) show fluorescence images of a PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA− PC3-flu tumor-bearing mouse injected intravenously with exemplary compound YC-VIII-36. Compound YC-VIII-36 (150 □g) was injected into the tail vein of a nude mouse. The excitation frequency was 465 nm with a 5 s exposure. Fluorescence emission was measured at 500, 520, 540, and 580 nm, followed by spectral unmixing.
  • FIG. 12 (bottom) show the biodistribution of compound YC-VII-36 (150 □g) 180 minutes after injection.
    • FACS and Cell Sorting
  • Flow cytometric analysis (FCA): Confluent flasks of PC3-PIP, PC3-flu and LNCap cells were trypsinized, washed with complete growth media (to neutralize trypsin) and counted. Approximately 5 million of each cell type in suspension was incubated with 1 mM of compound YC-VIII-36 for 30 min with occasional shaking at 37° C. in the humidified incubator with 5% CO2. After incubation, the cells were washed twice with ice cold KRB buffer and fixed with 2% paraformaldehyde (ice cold). The samples were stored on ice and protected from light until the FCA was done. FCA was performed using a FACS Calibur flow cytometer (Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA). For data acquisition, singlets were gated as the prominent cluster of cells identified from a plot of side scatter (SSC) width versus forward scatter (FSC) width to ensure that cell aggregates were excluded from analysis. 50,000 total events were counted to estimate the positively stained cells from a plot of Fl-1 (X-axis) versus Fl-2 (Y-axis). All data were analyzed using CellQuest version 3.3 software.
  • Flow sorting: PC3-PIP cells were labeled with 1 mM of compound YC-VIII-36 for 30 min at 37° C. in the humidified incubator with 5% CO2. Cells were washed twice with ice cold KRB buffer and stored on ice. Flow sorting was performed using FACS Aria system (Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA) within 10-15 minutes after completion of last wash. Both the stained (positive) and also the unstained (negative) subpopulations were collected in sterile tubes containing 3 ml of complete growth media. Following sorting, cells were centrifuged, resuspended in warm complete growth media, transferred to tissue culture flasks and incubated at 37° C. in the humidified incubator with 5% CO2 for culture. The sorted subpopulations, “PIP-positive (PIP-pos)” and “PIP-negative (PIP-neg)” cells, were re-analyzed by FCA (as above) at passage 3 for further confirmation of their heterogeneity.
  • Determination of saturation dose inflow cytometry: Approximately 5 million cells each of PIP-pos (sorted) and PC3-flu were labeled as above with varying doses of compound #. The cells were washed twice with ice cold KRB buffer and fixed with 2% paraformaldehyde (ice cold). The samples were stored on ice and protected from light till the FCA was done. Singlets were gated as above in a plot of SSC vs. FSC to exclude the aggregates. Standard gating was used on X-axis (Fl-1) for analysis of stained cells in all the doses.
  • PC3-flu, PC3-PIP, and LNCaP cells were treated with compound YC-VIII-36, and analyzed using fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) to determine the percentage of cells expressing PSMA on the cell surface. FIG. 13 shows FACS analysis showing the percent subpopulation of PSMA positive cells in PC3-flu, PC3-PIP, and LNCaP cells. As expected PC3-flu (PSMA−) cells (left) show a very small percentage, while PC3-PIP (PSMA+, center) and LNCaP (PSMA+ right) show greater percentages.
  • PC3-PIP (PSMA+) cells were sorted using FACS following treatment with compound YC-VIII-36. FIG. 14 shows cell sorting of PC3-PIP cells, including initial percentage (top center), and after 3 passages of sorting (bottom). Region R2 indicates positive PSMA surface expression, as indicated by binding compound YC-VIII-36. The results show an increase in the percentage of PSMA expressing cells following three rounds of cell sorting.
  • Determination of detection limit (FIG. 15 ): PIP-pos cells were mixed with 10 million of PC3-flu cells in triplicates in different ratios—1 in 106, 105, 104, 103 and 102 respectively. All the tubes containing cell suspensions in complete growth media including controls [10 million PC3-flu cells with 0% PIP-pos cells and 10 million PIP-pos cells (100%)] were incubated with 100 nM of compound #YC-VIII-36 at 37° C. in the humidified incubator with 5% CO2 as above, with occasional stirring. The cells were washed, fixed with 2% paraformaldehyde as above and analyzed with LSRII (Becton Dickinson, San Jose, CA) for the determination of detection limit. Singlets were gated as above in a plot of SSC vs. FSC to exclude the aggregates. 1 million total events were counted to estimate the positively stained cells from plot of Fl-1 (X-axis) versus Fl-2 (Y-axis). Two gates, P2 at higher intensity (103 and above) and P3 at lower intensity (102-103) on X-axis (Fl-1) was applied for analysis of positive cells. All the data were analyzed using DIVA 6.1.3 software.
    • Example 4
  • 2-{3-[5-(7-{5-[4-(2-Amino-2-carboxy-ethyl)-[1,2,3]triazol-1-yl]-1-carboxy-pentylcarbamoyl}-heptanoylamino)-1-carboxy-pentyl]-ureido}-pentanedioic acid, compound SRV32. The compound SRV32 was prepared in three steps following the scheme shown below.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00080
  • The compound 1 was prepared from literature method (Banerjee et al., J Med Chem, vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). To a solution of compound 1 (100 mg, 0.107 mmol in 5 ml DMF) was added H-Lys(ε-azide)-OH (20 mg, 0.107 mmol) (Boc-Lys(Azide)-OH was purchased from Anaspec. The removal of Boc group was done by treating the commercial compound with 1:1 TFA:CH2Cl2 at room temperature for 4 hr, and the solution was stirred for 16 h at rt. The solvent was removed under vacuum. The solid residue thus obtained was dissolved in 10 ml ethyl acetate and extracted with 3×10 mL water. Organic layer was dried under vacuum to get a colorless solid as the protected azido urea compound SRV25. ESIMS: 991 [M+1]+. To the Compound SRV25 (60 mg, 0.06 mmol in 1 ml t-BuOH), was added N(a)-Boc-L-propargylglycine (Anaspec) (14 mg, 0.012 mmol in 1 ml t-BuOH), followed by Cu(OAc)2—H2O (2 mg, 0.012 mmol in 1 ml water) and sodium ascorbate (4.75 mg, 0.024 mmol in 1 ml water) and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 12 h. The product was extracted into CH2Cl2 and washed twice with aqueous NaCl. The aqueous phases were re-extracted with CH2Cl2. The organic phases were combined, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated. The product, compound SRV29, was purified by a silica gel pipette column eluted with solution of 90/10 CH2Cl2/MeOH. ESIMS: Calcd for C6H82N8O18 1203.57, found 1204[M+1]+.
  • The compound SRV29 was dissolved in 2 ml 1/1 CHCl3/TFA and stirred overnight. The solution was removed under vacuum to get a colorless solid. The solid was washed 3 times with 5 ml CH2Cl2 to remove impurities. The crude solid, compound SRV32 was further purified by HPLC using an 85/15 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each) flow rate 4 ml, Rt=10.2 min. ESMS: 742.77[M+1]+, 1H NMR (D2O) δ: 7.46 (M, 1H), 5.2 (m, 2H) 4.35 (m, 1H), 4.26 (m, 1H), 4.18 (m, 1H), 3.80-3.70 (m, 1H), 3.18 (t, J=6 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.51 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.40-2.18 (m, 25H).
  • Radiolabeling with Tc-99m was performed by the same procedure described previously (Banerjee et al, J Med Chem, vol. 51. pp. 4504-4517, 2008).
    • Biodistribution and Imaging
  • A single SCID mouse implanted with both a PC-3 PIP (PSMA+) and a PC-3 flu (PSMA−) xenograft was injected intravenously with compound 99mTc-SRV32 in saline. At 0.5 hr, 1 hr, 2 h, and 5 h p.i. the mouse was anesthetized with isoflurane and maintained under 1% isoflurane in oxygen. The mouse was positioned on the X-SPECT (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) gantry and was scanned using two low energy, high-resolution pinhole collimators (Gamma Medica) rotating through 360° in 6° increments for 45 seconds per increment. All gamma images were reconstructed using Lunagem software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA).
  • Immediately following SPECT acquisition, the mice were then scanned by CT (X-SPECT) over a 4.6 cm field-of-view using a 600 μA, 50 kV beam. The SPECT and CT data were then coregistered using the supplier's software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) and displayed using AMIDE (http://amide.sourceforge.net/). Data were reconstructed using the Ordered Subsets-Expectation Maximization (OS-EM) algorithm.
  • Tissue biodistribution was measured. Results are summarized in the following table. 99mTc-SRV32 exhibited high uptake (˜7% ID/g at 30 minutes), and good clearance from non-target tissues.
  • Tissue 30 min 60 min 120 min 300 min
    blood 1.38 ± 0.4 0.63 ± 0.1 0.61 ± 0.3 0.19 ± 0.1
    liver 14.26 ± 1.0  9.81 ± 2.0 5.65 ± 0.5 3.06 ± 0.6
    stomach 0.77 ± 0.1  0.42 ± 0.09 0.29 ± 0.1 0.18 ± 0.1
    spleen 26.10 ± 9.0  17.31 ± 6.6  5.80 ± 1.9 1.26 ± 0.5
    kidney 139.53 ± 17.2  144.65 ± 15.1  151.23 ± 37.1  80.00 ± 8.4 
    muscle 0.56 ± 0.1 0.40 ± 0.2 0.16 ± 0.1 0.51 ± 0.6
    small 1.94 ± 1.1 0.74 ± 0.3 0.39 ± 0.2 0.26 ± 0.2
    intestine
    large 0.61 ± 0.1 0.36 ± 0.1 0.53 ± 0.4 2.96 ± 1.3
    intestine
    bladder 1.07 ± 0.1 3.09 ± 2.6 5.39 ± 7.1 2.74 ± 2.1
    PC-3 PIP 6.67 ± 1.6 5.32 ± 1.2 3.77 ± 0.8 2.19 ± 0.5
    PC-3 flu 0.75 ± 0.2 0.45 ± 0.3 0.35 ± 0.2 0.43 ± 0.4
  • A single SCID mouse implanted with a PSMA+ LnCaP xenograft was injected intravenously with compound 99mTc-SRV32 in saline. At 0.5 hr, and 3.5 hr p.i. the mouse was anesthetized with isoflurane and maintained under 1% isoflurane in oxygen. The mouse was positioned on the X-SPECT (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) gantry and was scanned using two low energy, high-resolution pinhole collimators (Gamma Medica) rotating through 360° in 6° increments for 45 seconds per increment. All gamma images were reconstructed using Lunagem software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA). Immediately following SPECT acquisition, the mice were scanned by CT (X-SPECT) over a 4.6 cm field-of-view using a 600 μA, 50 kV beam. The SPECT and CT data were then coregistered using the supplier's software (Gamma Medica, Northridge, CA) and displayed using AMIDE (http://amide.sourceforge.net/). Data were reconstructed using the Ordered Subsets-Expectation Maximization (OS-EM) algorithm. Images are shown in FIG. 16 .
    • Comparative Example 1
  • Under the same conditions, tumor uptake for compound 99mTc-L1, shown below, was determined. Results are summarized in the following table. The data show that while 99mTC-L1 shows good retention, compound 99mTc-SRV32 has greater retention in vivo both for target tumor and nontarget tissues, and lower GI uptake than the previous 99mTcL1 compound at initial time points.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00081
  • Tissue 30 min 60 min 120 min 300 min
    PC-3 PIP 7.9 ± 4   3.9 ± 0.6 2.0 ± 0.8 0.8 ± 0.5
    PC-3 flu 0.3 ± 0.2 0.2 ± 0.1 0.05 ± 0.02 0.01 ± 0.01
    • Example 5 68Ga Compounds General
  • Solvents and chemicals obtained from commercial sources were of analytical grade or better and used without further purification. All experiments were performed in duplicate or triplicate to ensure reproducibility. Analytical thin-layer chromatography (TLC) was performed using Aldrich aluminum-backed 0.2 mm silica gel Z19, 329-1 plates and visualized by ultraviolet light (254 nm), 12 and 1% ninhydrin in EtOH. Flash chromatography was performed using silica gel purchased from Bodman (Aston PA), MP SiliTech 32-63 D 60 Å. 1H NMR spectra were recorded on either a Varian Mercury 400 MHz or on a Bruker Ultrashield™ 400 MHz spectrometer. Chemical shifts (δ) are reported in ppm downfield by reference to proton resonances resulting from incomplete deuteration of the NMR solvent. Low resolution ESI mass spectra were obtained on a Bruker Dahonics Esquire 3000 Plus spectrometer. Higher-resolution FAB mass spectra were obtained on a JOEL JMS-AX505HA mass spectrometer in the mass spectrometer facility at the University of Notre Dame. Optical rotation was measured on a Jasco P-1010 polarimeter. Infrared spectra were obtained on a Broker Tensor 27 spectrometer. High-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) purification of new compounds was performed using a Phenomenex C18 Luna 10-x 250 mm2 column on a Waters 600E Delta LC system with a Waters 486 tunable absorbance UV/Vis detector, both controlled by Empower software.
  • For purification of radiolabeled [68Ga]SRV100, a Varian Microsorb-Mv C 18 250×4.6 mm2 column was used. HPLC was performed using the following isocratic conditions: For Method 1, the mobile phase was 80% solvent A (0.1% TFA in water) and 20% solvent B (0.1% TFA in CH3CN), flow rate 4 mL/min; for Method 2, the mobile phase was 80% solvent A and 20% solvent B, flow rate 1 mL/min. Method 1 was used for purification of compounds SRV27, [69/71Ga]SRV27, SRV100, [69/71Ga]SRV100 and [68Ga]SRV27.
  • For purification of [68Ga]SRV100 Method 2 was used. For radiosynthetic purification, HPLC was performed on a Varian Prostar System (Palo Alto, CA), equipped with a model 490 UV absorbance detector and a Bioscan NaI scintillation detector connected to a Bioscan Flow-count system controlled by Empower software.
    • Radiochemistry
  • 68Ga labeling protocol for compound SRV27 was done following a literature procedure (Zhernosekov et al., J Nucl Med, vol. 48, pp. 1741-1748, 2007). A detailed description is given below.
  • 1. 13.2 mCi of mGa in 7 mL of 0.1N HCl were obtained from more than 1-year-old 740-MBq generator. The solution was transferred on a cation-exchange cartridge, Phenomenex Strata-X-C tubes (33 μm strong cation exchange resin, part no. 8B-S029-TAK, 30 mg/1 ml).
    2. The column was eluted with 5 ml of a solution of 20/80 0.10N hydrochloric acid/acetone. The eluant remaining on the cation-exchanger was removed by passage of nitrogen. These two processes aimed to remove most of the remaining chemical and radiochemical impurities from the resin, whereas Ga(III) should quantitatively remain on the column.
    3. The column was filled with 150 μL of a 2.4/97.6 0.05N HCl/acetone solution. About 2 min standing appeared to be best for complete desorption of the Ga(III) from the resin into the liquid phase. An additional 250 μL of this mixture were applied, and the purified 68Ga(III) was obtained in 400 μL of this eluent overall.
    4. The fraction (400 μL eluent) was used directly for the labeling of DOTA-urea compound. The processed activity was added to 500 μL pure H2O in a standard glass reagent vial containing 100 μl (92 nmol, 1 mg/mL solution) of ligand. No buffer solution was added. The reaction vial was heated at 95° C. for 10 min. The complexation was monitored by injecting aliquots of 100 μl (210 μCi) of the solution in HPLC. Product obtained=160 μCi.
    Radiochemical Yield=(160/210)×100=76.19% (without decay correction). Solvent system 80/20 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each), Rf (retention time)=25 min for the compound and Rt=19 min for the free ligand. Product obtained=5.92 MBq. For [68Ga]SRV27, radiochemical yield: 76.2% (without decay correction). HPLC was performed by Method 1 as described in the General experimental section. Rt=25 min for the desired product and Rt=19 min for the free ligand. For [68Ga]SRV100, radiochemical yield: 70%. HPLC was performed by Method 2 as mentioned in General experimental section. Rt=22.5 min for the desired product and Rt=16 min for the free ligand.
    • Cell Lines and Tumor Models
  • PC-3 PIP (PSMA+) and PC-3 flu (PSMA−) cell lines were obtained from Dr. Warren Heston (Cleveland Clinic) and were maintained as previously described (Mease et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 14, pp. 3036-3043, 2008). LNCaP cells were obtained from American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, VA) and were maintained as per ATCC guidelines. All cells were grown to 80-90% confluence before trypsinization and formulation in Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS, Sigma, St. Louis, MO) for implantation into mice.
  • Animal studies were undertaken in compliance with institutional guidelines related to the conduct of animal experiments. For biodistribution studies of [Ga]SRV27, and [68Ga]SRV100 and imaging studies of [68Ga]SRV100, male SCID mice (NCI) were implanted subcutaneously with 1-5×106 PSMA+ PC-3 PIP and PSMA− PC-3 flu cells behind either shoulder. For imaging studies of [68Ga] SRV27, male SCID mice (NCI) were implanted subcutaneously with 5×106 LNCaP cells behind the right shoulder. Mice were imaged or used in biodistribution studies when the tumor xenografts reached 3-5 mm in diameter.
    • Synthesis of SRV27
  • [2-{3-[5-(7-{1-Benzyloxycarbonyl-5-[2-(4,7,10-tris- carboxymethyl 1,4,7,10 tetraazacyclododec-1-yl)-acetylamino]-pentylcarbamoyl}-heptanoylamino)-1-carboxy-pentyl]-ureido}-pentanedioic acid (SR V27). Compound SRV27 was prepared in three steps according to the following scheme.
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00082
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00083
  • Compound 1 was prepared according to a literature method (Banerjee et al., J Med Chem, vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008). To a solution of compound 1 (100 mg, 0.11 mmol in 5 ml, DMF) was added H-Lys(Boc)-OBz (36 mg, 0.11 mmol) (Hamachi et al., Chem. Eur. J., vol. 5, pp. 1503-1511, 1999). The solution was stirred for 16 h at ambient temperature. The solvent was removed under vacuum. The solid residue thus obtained was dissolved in 10 mL ethyl acetate and extracted with 3×10 mL water. The organic layer was dried under vacuum to provide a colorless solid ESIMS: 1154 [M+1]+. This crude compound was dissolved in 3 mL CHCl3 followed by addition of 3 mL TFA at 0° C. The solution was allowed to stir overnight at ambient temperature. The volume of the solution was reduced under vacuum and the solid residue was washed with 3×5 mL CH2Cl2 to remove impurities. The colorless solid residue, 3, was dried under vacuum to give 80 mg of compound 3. Compound 3 was purified further by using a 2 g Sep Pak C18 cartridge with a solution of 85/15 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each). 1H NMR (D2O, δ): 7.5 (bm, 5H), 4.27 (m, 1H), 4.12 (m, 1H), 3.99 (m, 1H), 3.04 (m, 4H), 2.38 (m, 2H), 2.3-1.0 (m, 27H). ESIMS: 694 [M+1]+. To a solution of DOTA-mono-NHS (54 mg, 0.11 mmol in 5 mL DMF) was added 3 (80 mg, 0.08 mmol) and TEA (60 μL, 0.43 mmol) and the solution was allowed to stir for 16 h at ambient temperature. Solvent was removed under vacuum and the crude solid, SRV27, was purified by HPLC Method 1, retention time 19 min.
  • Yield: ˜40%. ESMS: 1080[M+1]+, HRESI+-MS: Calcd. for C49H77N9O18, 1080.5487 [M+H], found: 1080.5459. 1H NMR (D2O) δ: 7.88 (m, 4H), 4.26-4.1 (m, 5H), 3.45-3.18 (m, 16H), 2.52-2.43 (m, 16H), 2.40-2.18 (m, 25H). 13C (CD3CO2D) d: 177.5, 177.6, 175.3, 172.3, 160.6, 160.2, 159.8, 159.5, 135.5, 128.5, 128.4, 119.9, 117, 114.0, 111.3, 67.3, 55.5, 53.1, 51.0, 49.9, 30.7, 28.0, 26.4, 25.1.
  • 2-{3-[5-(7-{1-Benzyloxycarbonyl-5-[2-(4,7,10-tris-carboxymethyl-1,4,7,10tetraaza-cyclododec-1-yl)-acetylamino]-pentylcarbamoyl}-heptanoylamino)-1-carboxy-pentyl]-ureido}-pentanedioic acid Gallium (HI). SRV31 ([69/71Ga]-SRV27). To a solution of GaNO3 (10 mg, 39 μmol) in deionized water was added compound SRV27 (4.2 mg, 39 μmol) in 1 mL deionized water and the resulting solution was heated in boiling water for 10 min. The solvent was evaporated to dryness and the crude residue was purified by HPLC using an 80/20 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each), flow rate 8 ml/min. Retention time for the product was at 12 min. Yield: ˜35% ESMS: 1146[M+1]+, 1H NMR (D2O) δ: 7.88 (m, 4H), 4.26-4.1 (m, 5H), 3.45 (m, 8H) 3.18 (m, 8H), 2.69 (m, 8H), 2.51 (m, 8H), 2.40-2.18 (m, 25H).
    • SRV100
  • 2-[3-(1-Carboxy-5-{7-[5-carboxy-5-(3-phenyl-2-{3-phenyl-2-[2-(4,7,10-tris-carboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraaza-cyclododec-1-yl)-acetylamino]-propionylamino}-propionylamino)-pentylcarbamoyl]-heptanoylamino}-pentyl)-ureido]-pentanedioic acid, (SRV100). Compound SRV100 was prepared according to the scheme shown in FIG. 19 . Fmoc-Lys(Boc)-Wang resin (100 mg, 0.43 mM) was allowed to swell with CH2Cl2 (3 mL) followed by DMF (3 mL). A solution of 20% piperidine in DMF (3×3 mL) was added to the resin that was then shaken gently on a mechanical shaker for 30 min at ambient temperature. The resin was washed with DMF (3×3 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3×3 mL). Formation of free amine was assessed by the Kaiser test (Kaiser et al., Anal Biochem, vol. 34, pp. 595-598, 1970). After swelling the resin in DMF, a solution of Fmoc-Phe-OH (3 eq), HBTU (3 eq), HOBt (3 eq), and DIPEA (4.0 eq) in DMF was added and gently shaken for 2 h. The resin was then washed with DMF (3×3 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3×3 mL). The coupling efficiency was assessed by the Kaiser Test. That aforementioned sequence was repeated for two more coupling steps with Fmoc-Phe-OH and DOTA-(t-butyl ester)3-CO2H. The resulting compound was cleaved from the resin using TFA:CH2Cl2 (1:1) and concentrated under vacuum to produce the free amine. The concentrated product was purified by using a C18 SepPak Vac 2 g column. The product was eluted with a solution 70/30 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each). ESIMS: 827 [M+1]+. Lyophilized amine (10 mg, 12 μmol in 2 mL DMF) was added to 1 (prepared separately) (20 mg, 21.4 μmol in 1 mL DMF) followed by TEA (214 μmol, 30 μL) and then stirred at 25° C. for 16 h. After solvent removal, solid residue was treated with 3 mL TFA:CH2Cl2 to remove the PMB group. The residue was washed 2×5 mL CH2Cl2 to remove impurities. The colorless solid residue thus obtained was purified by a C18 SepPak Vac 2 g column using an eluent of 70/30 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each) to produce SRV100 (SR-V-100). The product was further purified using preparative RP-HPLC by Method 1, retention time 17 min. Yield: ˜30%. ESMS m/Z: 1284[M+H]+, HRESI+-MS: Calcd. for C68H90N11O20, 1284.6365 [M+H], found: 1284.6358. 1H NMR (CD3CO2D) δ: 7.35-7.20 (m, 10H), 4.86 (bm, 2H), 4.57-4.46 (4H), 4.4-2.8 (m, 14H), 2.51 (t, 2h), 2.4-1.2 (m, 28H). 13C (CD3CO2D) δ: 176.5, 177, 177.06, 177.6, 173.6, 173.24, 161.3, 160.92, 160.53, 160.14, 159.77, 137.95, 137.06, 130.5, 129.5, 127.9, 127.71, 120.8, 118.0, 115.1, 112.3, 56.1, 55.5, 53.5, 53.3, 40.1, 38.8, 36.832.6, 31.8, 30.7, 29.42, 27.9, 26.53.
  • 2-[3-(1-Carboxy-5-{7-[5-carboxy-5-(3-phenyl-2-{3-phenyl-2-[2-(4,7,10-tris-carboxymethyl-1,4,7,10tetraaza-cyclododec-1-yl)-acetylamino]-propionylamino}-propionylamino)-pentylcarbamoyl]-heptanoylamino}-pentyl)-ureido]-pentanedioic acid Gallium (III), [69/71Ga]SRV100. This compound was prepared according to the same general procedure as described for [69/71Ga]SRV27. Compound [69771Ga]SRV100 was purified by Method 1, retention time 22 min. Yield: ˜30%. ESMS m/Z: 1351[MH−H]+, HRESI+-MS: Calcd. For C68H86GaNnNaO20, 1372.5204 [M+Na]+, found: 1372.5199.
    • Compound Characterization—Lipophilicity
  • Partition coefficients, Log0/W (pH=7.4) values were determined according to a literature procedure (Antunes et al., Bioconjug Chem, vol. 18, pp. 84-92, 2007). Briefly, a solution of either [68Ga]SRV27 or [68Ga]SRV100 was added to a presaturated solution of 1-octanol (5 mL) mixed with phosphate buffered saline (PBS) (5 mL) in a 15 mL centrifuge tube.
  • After vigorously shaking the mixture, it was centrifuged at 3,000 rpm for 5 min. Aliquots (100 μL) were removed from the two phases and the radioactivity was measured in a γ-counter, 1282 Compugamma CS (LKB, Wallac, Turku, Finland).
  • On analysis of the reaction mixture by HPLC, the retention time of the radiolabeled compound was slightly longer than the corresponding free ligand. The specific radioactivity of purified [68Ga]SRV27 and [68Ga]SRV100 was between 3.0 and 6.0 MBq/nmol.
  • The log Poctanol/water values for [68Ga]SRV27 and [68Ga]SRV100 were approximately −3.9 as determined by the shake-flask method (Antunes et al., Bioconjug Chem, vol. 18, pp. 84-92, 2007). However, using an HPLC method, we found that the HPLC retention times for SRV100 (28 min) and [69/71Ga]SRV100 (32 min) were longer than for SRV27 (19 min) and [69/71Ga]SRV27 (24 min). It is evident that SRV100 and the corresponding gallium compound were more lipophilic than SRV27 and its gallium-labeled analog, which is reasonable in light of the presence of two phenylalanine residues in the long linker of SRV100, while SRV27 has only one lysine residue protected as the benzyl ester.
    • Cell Binding Assay
  • Ki values for SRV27, [69,71Ga]SRV27, SRV100 and [69, 71Ga]SRV100 were determined using a competitive N-acetyl aspartyl glutamate (NAAG) fluorescence cell binding assay adapted from the literature (Kozikowski et al., J Med Chem, vol. 47, pp. 1729-1738, 2004). All compounds were found to be strong inhibitors of PSMA. Compounds SRV27 and [69, 71Ga]SRV27 had inhibitory capacities of 2.9 nM and 29 nM, respectively. For SRV100 and [69, 71Ga]SRV100, values were 1.23 nM and 0.44 nM, respectively.
    • Ex Vivo Biodistribution
  • PSMA+ PC-3 PIP and PSMA− PC-3 flu xenograft-bearing SCID mice were injected via the tail vein with 30 μCi (1.1 MBq) of [68Ga]SRV27 or [68Ga]SRV100. In case each four mice were sacrificed by cervical dislocation at 30, 60, 120, 180 min p.i. For [68Ga]SR V27 and at 5, 60, 120, 180 min p.i. for [68Ga]SRV100. The heart, lungs, liver, stomach, pancreas, spleen, fat, kidney, muscle, small and large intestines, urinary bladder, and PC-3 PIP and flu tumors were quickly removed. A 0.1 mL sample of blood was also collected. Each organ was weighed, and the tissue radioactivity was measured with an automated gamma counter (1282 Compugamma CS, Pharmacia/LKB Nuclear, Inc., Gaithersburg, MD). The % ID/g was calculated by comparison with samples of a standard dilution of the initial dose. All measurements were corrected for decay.
  • Compound [68Ga]SRV27 was assessed for its pharmacokinetics ex vivo in severe-combined immunodeficient (SCID) mice bearing both PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA−PC3-flu xenografts (Chang et al., Cancer Res. vol. 59, pp. 3192-3198, 1999). Table 1 shows the percent injected dose per gram (% ID/g) of radiotracer in selected organs for [68Ga]SR V27.
  • TABLE 1
    Ex vivo tissue biodistribution of [68Ga]SRV27
    Tissue
    30 min 60 min 120 min 180 min
    blood 2.20 ± 0.90 1.93 ± 0.70 0.80 ± 0.30 0.62 ± 0.34
    heart 0.70 ± 0.13 0.50 ± 0.08 0.21 ± 0.08 0.20 ± 0.02
    liver 0.84 ± 0.24 0.83 ± 0.10 0.42 ± 0.07 0.50 ± 0.03
    stomach 0.73 ± 0.13 0.75 ± 0.32 0.24 ± 0.07 0.24 ± 0.05
    spleen 4.90 ± 1.10 3.35 ± 1.20 0.43 ± 0.19 0.32 ± 0.13
    kidney 97.19 ± 16.07 64.68 ± 4.10  5.35 ± 2.12 2.13 ± 0.11
    muscle 0.46 ± 0.16 0.25 ± 0.07 0.08 ± 0.04 0.05 ± 0.01
    small intestine 0.79 ± 0.12 0.70 ± 0.34 0.26 ± 0.11 0.34 ± 0.20
    large intestine 0.77 ± 0.14 0.95 ± 0.53 0.34 ± 0.10 0.46 ± 0.10
    bladder 8.96 ± 5.30 25.29 ± 8.63  2.70 ± 4.02 5.39 ± 2.98
    PC-3 PIP 3.78 ± 0.90 3.32 ± 0.33 1.31 ± 0.06 1.10 ± 0.19
    PC-3 flu flu 0.82 ± 0.20 0.67 ± 0.08 0.41 ± 0.09 0.39 ± 0.02
    PIP:flu 4.61 4.93 3.24 2.77
    PIP:muscle 8.30 13.13 17.40 20.37
    flu:muscle 1.80 2.67 5.37 7.34
  • Compound [68Ga]SRV27 showed clear PSMA-dependent binding in PSMA+ PC3 PIP xenografts, reaching a maximum uptake of 3.78±0.90 (SEM) % ID/g at 30 min post-injection (p.i.). The blood, spleen and kidney displayed highest uptake at 30 min. By 60 min, the urinary bladder showed highest uptake, however, this uptake represents excretion at all time points. The high values noted in kidney are partially due to high expression of PSMA within proximal renal tubules (Silver et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 3, pp. 81-85, 197; Slusher et al., J Comp Neurol, vol. 315, pp. 271-229, 1992). Rapid clearance from the kidneys was demonstrated, decreasing from 97.19±16.07% ID/g at 30 min to 2.31±0.1 1% ID/g at 3 h. The radioactivity in the PSMA+ PIP tumor cleared more slowly, from its aforementioned value at 30 min to 1.08±0.19% ID/g at 3 h.
  • Compound [68Ga]SRV100 was also investigated for its pharmacokinetic characteristics in tumor bearing mice at 5 min, 1 h, 2 h and 3 h p.i. Table 2 shows the % ID/g of radiotracer in selected organs for [68Ga]SRV100.
  • TABLE 2
    Ex vivo tissue biodistribution of [68Ga]SRV100
    Tissue
    5 min 60 min 120 min 180 min
    blood 6.28 ± 0.08 0 .41 ± 0.05 0.15 ± 0.07 0.13 ± 0.01
    heart 2.01 ± 0.24 0.19 ± 0.07 0.05 ± 0.03 0.03 ± 0.01
    lung 4.59 ± 0.68 0.74 ± 0.54 0.20 ± 0.05 0.14 ± 0.03
    liver 1.57 ± 0.16 0.24 ± 0.09 0.19 ± 0.03 0.14 ± 0.02
    stomach 2.38 ± 0.35 0.38 ± 0.16 0.18 ± 0.02 0.04 ± 0.02
    pancreas 1.52 ± 0.19 0.25 ± 0.14 0.08 ± 0.03 0.04 ± 0.02
    spleen 5.17 ± 2.22 2.43 ± 1.07 0.78 ± 0.15 0.34 ± 0.09
    fat 1.03 ± 0.02 0.40 ± 0.04 0.08 ± 0.02 0.02 ± 0.01
    kidney 64.75 ± 12.00 26.57 ± 10.93 12.25 ± 1.79  10.04 ± 1.22 
    muscle 1.58 ± 0.33 0.15 ± 0.08 0.03 ± 0.02 0.00 ± 0.01
    small intestine 2.04 ± 0.25 0.23 ± 0.05 0.09 ± 0.04 0.06 ± 0.03
    large intestine 2.02 ± 0.49 0.50 ± 0.70 0.12 ± 0.03 0.12 ± 0.03
    bladder 5.97 ± 1.50 7.65 ± 3.34 1.41 ± 1.17 0.75 ± 0.54
    PC-3 PIP 6.61 ± 0.55 2.80 ± 1.32 3.29 ± 0.77 1.80 ± 0.16
    PC-3 flu 2.63 ± 0.51 0.16 ± 0.08 0.18 ± 0.03 0.12 ± 0.03
    PIP:flu 2.50 17.30 18.28 15.20
    PIP:muscle 4.17 23.27 122.13 436.29
    flu:muscle 1.67 1.34 6.68 28.70
  • As for [68Ga]SRV27, [68Ga]SRV100 showed PSMA-dependent tumor uptake. After a peak, flow-related, uptake at 5 min p.i. of 6.61±0.55%, [68Ga]SRV100 demonstrated a 2 h tumor uptake value of 3.29±0.77%, which dropped to 1.80±0.16% at 3 h. Uptake in blood was high at 5 min and rapidly washed out within 1 h. Non-target organs such as kidney, spleen and lung showed high uptake at 5 min and rapidly washed out with time. With the exception of the kidneys and spleen, clearance from blood and normal organs was faster for [68Ga]SRV100 than for [68Ga]SRV27. Again, high kidney uptake is associated with high expression of PSMA within proximal renal tubules (Silver et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 3, pp. 81-85, 197; Slusher et al, J Comp Neurol, vol. 315, pp. 271-229, 1992). Similar to [68Ga]SRV27, [68Ga]SRV100 demonstrated faster clearance of radioactivity from kidney than from the PSMA+ tumor. However, the rate of clearance from kidney for [68Ga]SRV100 was much slower than for [68Ga]SRV27, i.e., 65±12% at 5 min p.i. and 10.04±1.22% at 3 h.
    • Small Animal PET Imaging
  • A single SCID mouse implanted with a PSMA+ LNCaP xenograft was injected intravenously with 0.2 mCi (7.4 MBq) of [68Ga]SRV27 in 200 μL 0.9% NaCl. At 0.5 h p.i., the mouse was anesthetized with 3% isoflurane in oxygen for induction and maintained under 1.5% isoflurane in oxygen at a flow rate of 0.8 L/min. The mouse was positioned in the prone position on the gantry of a GE eXplore VISTA small animal PET scanner (GE Healthcare, Milwaukee, WI). Image acquisition was performed using the following protocol: The images were acquired as a pseudodynamic scan, i.e., a sequence of successive whole-body images were acquired in three bed positions for a total of 120 min. The dwell time at each position was 5 min, such that a given bed position (or mouse organ) was revisited every 15 min. An energy window of 250-700 keV was used. Images were reconstructed using the FORE/2D-OSEM method (two iterations, 16 subsets) and included correction for radioactive decay, scanner dead time, and scattered radiation. After PET imaging, the mobile mouse holder was placed on the gantry of an X-SPECT (Gamma Medica Ideas. Northridge, CA) small animal imaging device to acquire the corresponding CT. Animals were scanned over a 4.6 cm field-of-view using a 600 μA, 50 kV beam. The PET and CT data were then co-registered using Amira 5.2.0 software (Visage Imaging Inc., Carlsbad, CA).
  • Imaging studies of [68Ga]SRV100 and blocking studies of [68Ga]SRV27 were carried out on PSMA+ PC-3 PIP and PSMA− PC-3 flu xenograft-bearing SCID mice or PSMA+ PC-3 PIP (25.9 MBq in 100 μL NaCl) xenograft-bearing SCID mice. At 30 min, 1 h and 2 h p.i. the mice were anesthetized and whole-body images were obtained using the PET scanner as mentioned above, in two bed positions, 15 min at each position for a total of 30 min using the same energy window. Images were reconstructed and co-registered with the corresponding CT images using the same methods as described above.
  • FIGS. 17 and 18 demonstrate the high target selectivity of [68Ga] SRV27 and [68Ga]SRV100 by delineating the PSMA+ tumors. Although a PSMA− control tumor was not included in FIG. 17 , a separate blocking study was performed for [Ga]SRV27, in which an animal pre-treated with 50 mg/kg of the known PSMA-binding ligand, 2-(phosphonomethyl)pentanedioic acid (2-PMPA) (Jackson et al., J Med Chem, vol. 39. pp. 619-622, 1996), did not demonstrate PSMA+ tumor uptake, attesting to the binding specificity of this compound. The more quantitative, ex vivo studies of [68Ga]SRV27 and [68Ga]SRV100 further supported high PSMA target specificity, demonstrating target-to-nontarget (PIP/flu) ratios of approximately 5 and 18 at 1 h and 2 h p.i., respectively. One hour and 2 h PSMA+ tumor uptake values for these compounds, 3.32±0.33% and 3.29±0.77%, respectively, for [68Ga]SRV27 and [Ga]SRV100, are comparable to other radiometallated PSMA inhibitors (Banerjee et al., J Med Chem, vol. 51. pp. 4504-4517, 2008). As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 those values are sufficient for clear tumor imaging. Notably, PIP tumors contain about one order of magnitude lower PSMA than LNCaP tumors (data not shown), which are often employed to assess for binding specificity of PSMA-targeting agents. PIP/flu is the preferred comparison as both are derived from PC-3 cells, providing a more controlled study.
  • Intense radiotracer uptake was seen only in the kidneys and tumor for both [68Ga]SRV27 (FIG. 17 ) and [68Ga]SRV100 (FIG. 18 ). As noted above for the ex vivo study, the intense renal uptake was partially due to specific binding of the radiotracer to proximal renal tubules (Silver et al., CHn Cancer Res, vol. 3, pp. 81-85, 197; Slusher et al., J Comp Neurol, vol. 315, pp. 271-229, 1992) as well as to excretion of this hydrophilic compound. Apart from the kidneys, only the PSMA+ tumor demonstrated significant radiotracer uptake.
    • Discussion
  • Because of its demonstrated clinical utility and the appearance of dual modality (PET/computed tomography (CT)) systems, clinical PET imaging has been accelerating worldwide and may soon become the dominant technique in nuclear medicine. PET isotopes tend to be short-lived and enable synthesis of “physiologic” radiotracers, namely, those that incorporate 150, 13N or 11C, enabling precise conformity to the tracer principle. Being essentially isosteric to H, F enables nearly tracer-level studies, with important caveats, particularly for [18F]fluorodeoxyglucose (FDG), which is by far the most commonly used radiopharmaceutical for PET. But, in part because FDG does not accumulate well within many tumor types, including prostate cancer, there has been a re-emergence in the development of radiometallated peptides, often employing 99mTc, that target 0-protein coupled receptors. Gallium-68 provides a link between PET and single photon emission computed tomography (SPECT) since metal chelating methodology needed for 99mTc can also be applied to 68Ga. A further analogy is the convenience of use of a 68Ge/68Ga generator (PET), as with 99Mo99mTc (SPECT), to provide readily available isotope, with no need for an in-house cyclotron. Although 68F-labeled, low molecular weight PSMA inhibitors have shown promise in preclinical imaging studies (Mease et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 14, pp. 3036-3043, 2008; Lapi et al., J Nucl Med, vol. 50, pp. 2042-2048, 2009), the availability of generator-produced 68Ga and the extension to PET from our published 99mTc-labeled series of PSMA-binding radiometallated imaging agents (Banerjee et al., J Med Chem, vol. 51, pp. 4504-4517, 2008) provided the rationale for this study.
    • Example 6
  • Compound SRV27 and SRV100 were prepared as described in Example 5. In-111 labeling was generally performed by treatment of SRV27 or SRV100 or SRV73 with 111InCl3, in 200 mM aqueous NaOAc −60° C. for 30 minutes. Specifically, for SRV27, 60 μl of SRV27 (2 mg/mL, sodium acetate) was combined with 100 μl sodium acetate and 3 mCi 111InCl3 in a 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube and left at for 60° C. for 30 min. The radiolabeled product was diluted with 800 μl water and purified by HPLC. Radiolabeling yield is 1.7 mCi (−57%) and radiochemical purity was >99.9%
    • SRV73
  • Compound SRV73 was prepared by the method outlined in the scheme below. Compound SRV73 is a bimodal compound having a fluorescent dye moiety and a metal chelating moiety
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00084
    • Small Animal PET Imaging
  • SPECT imaging experiments for [111In]SRV27, [111In]SRV100 and [111In]SRVTS were performed using the same general procedure described for [99Tc]SRV32 described in Example 4.
  • SPECT-CT imaging experiment of compound [111In]SRV27 (FIG. 20 ) illustrated clear PSMA-dependent binding in PSMA+ PC3 PIP xenografts within 1 h post injection. The high values noted in kidney are partially due to high expression of PSMA within proximal renal tubules (Silver et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 3, pp. 81-85, 197; Slusher et al., J Comp Neurol, vol. 315, pp. 271-229, 1992). Rapid clearance from the kidneys was observed while the activity retained in PSMA+ tumor even after four days post injection.
  • SPECT-CT imaging experiment of compound [111In]SRV100 (FIG. 21 ) demonstrated similar clear PSMA-dependent binding in PSMA+ PC3 PIP xenografts within 2 h post injection. The high values noted in kidney are partially due to high expression of PSMA within proximal renal tubules (Silver et al., Clin Cancer Res, vol. 3, pp. 81-85, 197; Slusher et al., J Comp Neurol, vol. 315, pp. 271-229, 1992). Rapid clearance from the kidneys was observed while the activity retained in PSMA+ tumor even after four days post injection. The longer tumor activity retention for [111In]SRV27 and [111In]SRV100 might be useful in Y-90/Lu-177 based radiotherapeutic applications.
  • FIG. 22 demonstrates clear tumor uptake for [111In]SRV73 at 7 h post injection. This is significant since after attaching a bulky fluorescent dye, rhodamine, the compound retains its PSMA binding activity. This is an example of dual modality application for this class of compounds.
    • Example 7 SRV134
  • 2-{3-[1-Carboxy-5-(7-{5-carboxy-5-[3-phenyl-2-(3-phenyl-2-{2-[2-(2-tritylsulfanyl-acetylamino)-acetylamino]-acetylamino}-propionylamino)-propionylamino]-pentylcarbamoyl}-heptanoylamino)-pentyl]-ureido}-pentanedioic acid (SRVI34). SRVI34 was prepared according to the scheme below. Lys(Boc)-Wang resin (100 mg, 0.43 mM) was allowed to swell with CH2Cl2 (3 mL) followed by DMF (3 mL). A solution of 20% piperidine in DMF (3×3 mL) was added to the resin that was then shaken gently on a mechanical shaker for 30 min at ambient temperature. The resin was washed with DMF (3×3 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3×3 mL). Formation of free amine was assessed by the Kaiser test. After swelling the resin in DMF, a solution of Fmoc-Phe-OH (3 eq), HBTU (3 eq), HOBt (3 eq), and DIPEA (4.0 eq) in DMF was added and gently shaken for 2 h. The resin was then washed with DMF (3×3 mL) and CH2Cl2 (3×3 mL). The coupling efficiency was assessed by the Kaiser Test. That aforementioned sequence was repeated for four more coupling steps with Fmoc-Phe-OH, Fmoc-Gly-OH, Fmoc-Gly-OH and S-trityl mercaptoacetic acid. Finally the product was cleaved from the resin using TFA:CH2Cl2 (1:1) and concentrated under vacuum to produce the free amine (SRV132). The concentrated product was purified by using a C18 SepPak Vac 2 g column. The product was eluted with a solution 70/30 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each). ESIMS: [M+1]+. Lyophilized SRV132 (10 mg, 12 μmol in 2 mL DMF) was added to the urea (compound 1 described in Example 5) (20 mg, 21.4 μmol in 1 mL DMF) followed by TEA (214 μmol, 30 μl) and then stirred at 25° C. for 16 h. The residue was washed 2×5 mL CH2Cl2 to remove impurities. The colorless solid residue thus obtained was purified by a C18 SepPak Vac 2 g column using an eluent of 70/30 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each). The product was further purified using preparative RP-HPLC by Method 1, retention time 17 min. Yield: ˜30%. ESMS m/Z: 1328 [M+H]+, 1H NMR (D2O/CD3CN (1:1) δ: 7.98 (m, 5H), 7.90-7.76 (m, 18H), 7.66 (m, 2H), 5.11 (m, 1H), 4.82-4.72 (m, 3H), 4.28 (m, 2H), 4.16 (m, 2H), 3.68 (m, 5H), 3.49-3.32 (m, 2H), 3.00 (m, 2H), 2.69 (m, 4H), 2.64-1.74 (m, 26H).
  • Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00085
    Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00086
  • Radiolabeling with Tc-99m: Radiolabeling was performed following a literature procedure (Wang et al., Nature Protocols, vol. 1, pp. 1477-1480, 2006). Briefly, 1 mg (75.3 μmol) of compound SRVI34 was dissolved in 1 ml of 0.5 M ammonium acetate buffer at pH 8. Disodium tartarate dihydrate was dissolved in the labelling buffer of 0.5 M ammonium acetate (pH 8) to a concentration of 50 mg/ml. Ascorbic acid-HCl solution was prepared by dissolving ascorbic acid in 10 mM HCl to a concentration of 1.0 mg/ml. A solution of SRVI34 (80 μl) was combined to a solution of 45 μl 0.25 M ammonium acetate, 15 μl tartarate buffer, followed by 5 μl of the freshly prepared 4 mg/ml SnCl2·2H2O solution in the ascorbate-HCl solution. The final pH will be about 8-8.5. After vortexing, was added 20 mCi of 99mTc-pertechnetate in 200 μl saline and was heated the solution at 90-100° C. for 20 min. Reaction mixture was cooled, diluted 850 μl of water and purified by HPLC using a Phenomenex C18 Luna 10×250 mm2 column on a Waters 600E Delta LC system with a Waters 486 tunable absorbance UV/Vis detector, both controlled by Empower software. HPLC solvent system, flow rate=4 ml/min, a gradient, 0-5 min, 80/20 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each solvent), 5-25 min 40/60 water/acetonitrile (0.1% TFA in each solvent) and 25-35 min 80/20 (0.1% TFA in each solvent) was used. Two radiolabeled products were found, called as [99mTc]SRVI34A (5.52 mCi) (retention time 17.5 min) and [99mTc]SRVI34B (6 mCi) (retention time 18.9 min). SRVI34A and SRVI32B are diastereomers, syn and anti-isomers with respect to the Tc═O group. Each product was neutralized with 50 μl of 1 M sodium bicarbonate and evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The obtained solid residues was dissolved in 200 μl saline and used for imaging and biodistribution studies.
    • Ex Vivo Biodistribution
  • PSMA+ PC-3 PIP and PSMA− PC-3 flu xenograft-bearing SCID mice were injected via the tail vein with 30 μCi [99mTc]SRV134B. Four mice were sacrificed by cervical dislocation at 30, 60, 120, and 300 min p.i. The heart, lungs, liver, stomach, pancreas, spleen, fat, kidney, muscle, small and large intestines, urinary bladder, and PC-3 PIP and flu tumors were quickly removed. A 0.1 mL sample of blood was also collected. Each organ was weighed, and the tissue radioactivity was measured with an automated gamma counter (1282 Compugamma CS, Pharmacia/LKB Nuclear, Inc., Gaithersburg, MD). The % ID/g was calculated by comparison with samples of a standard dilution of the initial dose. All measurements were corrected for decay.
  • Compound [99mTc]SRVI34B was assessed for its pharmacokinetics ex vivo in severe-combined immunodeficient (SCID) mice bearing both PSMA+ PC3-PIP and PSMA−PC3-flu xenografts (Chang et al., Cancer Res, vol. 59, pp. 3192-3198, 1999). Table 3 shows the percent injected dose per gram (% ID/g) of radiotracer in selected organs for [99mTc]SRVI34B.
  • TABLE 3
    Biodistribution data for [9y9ymmπTc]SRVI34B (n = 4)
    30 min 60 min 120 min 300 min
    Blood 1.13 ± 1.06 0.69 ± 0.08 0.27 ± 0.09 0.23 ± 0.00
    heart 1.11 ± 0.06 0.70 ± 0.16 0.61 ± 0.07 0.46 ± 0.05
    lung 4.08 ± 0.31 4.84 ± 1.26 4.02 ± 0.73 2.79 ± 0.74
    liver 1.55 ± 0.23 0.92 ± 0.37  0.50 ± 0.085 0.24 ± 0.09
    stomach 0.79 ± 0.23 0.77 ± 0.17 0.54 ± 12   0.27 ± 0.08
    pancreas 1.72 ± 0.74 1.42 ± 0.45 1.02 ± 0.29 0.94 ± 0.46
    spleen 56.44 ± 16.49 64.24 ± 13.29 58.27 ± 18.26 24.49 ± 3.63 
    fat 2.18037 ± 2.13 ± 0.58 1.82 ± 0.37 0.99 ± 0.03
    0.50
    kidney 62.45 ± 1.63  96.38 ± 22.74 104.84 ± 19.03  116.14 ± 2.71 
    muscle 1.20 ± 0.12 0.74 ± 0.04 1.29 ± 1.31 0.45 ± 0.31
    small 1.03 ± 0.40 1.43 ± 0.66 0.79 ± 0.33 0.23 ± 0.12
    intestine
    large 0.61 ± 0.03 0.63 ± 0.38 0.35 ± 0.12 1.30 ± 0.08
    intestine
    bladder 1.28 ± 0.25 2.07 ± 0.96 0.87 ± 0.33 0.51 ± 0.00
    PC-3 PIP 6.11 ± 0.94 7.99 ± 2.26 6.96 ± 1.13 4.81 ± 0.66
    PC-3 flu 0.98 ± 0.38 0.76 ± 0.51 0.50 ± 0.28 0.22 ± 0.11
    PIP:flu 6.28 10.56 14.05 22.18
    • Small Animal SPECT-CT Imaging
  • Imaging experiments for [99mTc] SRVI34A and [99mTc]SRV134B were done following the same procedures as was done for [99mTc]SRV32 (Example 4).
  • FIGS. 23, 24, 25, and 26 demonstrate the high target selectivity of [99mTc]SRVI34B by delineating the PSMA+ tumors. The compound [99mTc]SRV134B exhibited high uptake in PSMA+ tumor and no uptake in PSMA− tumor. The tumor uptake remains high 4.88% ID/g even at 5 hr post inject (p.i.). However this compound showed very high kidney uptake 116% ID/g even at 5 hr p.i. In addition this compound showed high spleen uptake 24.5% ID/g at 5 hr p.i.
    • REFERENCES
  • All publications, patent applications, patents, and other references mentioned in the specification are indicative of the level of those skilled in the art to which the presently disclosed subject matter pertains. All publications, patent applications, patents, and other references are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent application, patent, and other reference was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. It will be understood that, although a number of patent applications, patents, and other references are referred to herein, such reference does not constitute an admission that any of these documents forms part of the common general knowledge in the art. In case of a conflict between the specification and any of the incorporated references, the specification (including any amendments thereof, which may be based on an incorporated reference), shall control. Standard art-accepted meanings of terms are used herein unless indicated otherwise. Standard abbreviations for various terms are used herein.
    • Chen Y, Pullambhatla M, Banerjee S, Byun Y, Stathis M, Rojas C, Slusher B S, Mease R C, Pomper M G. Synthesis and biological evaluation of low molecular weight fluorescent imaging agents for the prostate-specific membrane antigen. Bioconjug Chem. 23: 2377-85 (2012);
    • Maresca K P, Hillier S M, Femia F J, Keith D, Barone C, Joyal J L, Zimmerman C N, Kozikowski A P, Barrett J A, Eckelman W C, Babic J W. A Series of Halogenated Heterodimeric Inhibitors of Prostate Specific Membrane Antigen (PSMA) as Radiolabeled Probes for Targeting Prostate Cancer J. Med. Chem. 52: 347-357 (2009);
    • Chen Y, Dhara S, Banerjee S, Byun Y, Pullambhatla M, Mease R C, Pomper M G. A low molecular weight PSMA-based fluorescent imaging agent for cancer. Biochem. Biophys Res. Commun. 390: 624-629 (2009);
    • Pomper, Martin G.; Mease, Ronnie C.; Ray, Sangeeta; Chen, Ying Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof;
    • International PCT patent application publication no. WO2010/108125A2, for PSMA-TARGETING COMPOUNDS AND USES THEREOF, to Pomper et al., published Sep. 23, 2010.
    • Rowe, SP, Gorin M S, Hammers H J, Javadi M S, Hawasli H, Szabo Z, Cho S Y, Pomper M G, Allaf M E. Imaging of metastatic clear cell renal cell carcinoma with PSMA-targeted 18F-DCFPyL PET/CT. Ann. Nucl. Med. 29(10) 877-882 2015.
  • Although the foregoing subject matter has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that certain changes and modifications can be practiced within the scope of the appended claims.

Claims (2)

1. A compound having the structure
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00087
wherein the subunits associated with elements p, q, r, and s may be in any order;
Z is tetrazole or CO2Q; each Q is independently selected from hydrogen or a protecting group, a is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
R is each independently H or C1-C4 alkyl;
r is 0 or 1;
Tz is a triazole group selected from the group consisting of
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00088
L1 is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00089
L2 is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00090
X1 is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, —NRC(S)NR—, or —NRC(O)O—;
X2 is —C(O)NR—, —NRC(O)NR—, —NRC(S)NR—, or —OC(O)NR—;
R5 is H, CO2H, or CO2R6, where R6 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl;
b is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
d is 1, 2, 3, or 4;
q is 0 or 1;
W is —NRC(O)—, —NRC(O)NR—, NRC(S)NR—, —NRC(O)O—, —OC(O)NR—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)NR—, or —C(O)O—
R2 and R3 are independently H, CO2H, or CO2R4, where R4 is a C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl, wherein if one of R2 and R3 is CO2H or CO2R2, then the other is H;
n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
s is 0 or 1,
Y is —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, —OC(O)—;
m is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
p is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and when p is 2 or 3, each R1 may be the same or different;
R1 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C12 aryl, or C4-C16 alkylaryl;
G is a moiety selected from the group consisting of
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00091
where Ch is a metal chelating moiety, optionally including a chelated metal; FG is a fluorescent dye moiety which emits in the visible or near infrared spectrum; one of A and A1 is Ch and the other is FG; V and V are independently —C(O)—, —NRC(O)—, —NRC(S)—, or —OC(O)—; and g is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;
with the condition that:
when G is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00092
 and r is 0, then q and s are both 1;
when G is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00093
 and r is 0, then q and s are both 0 or both 1;
when G is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00094
 then p is 0 and R2 is H, and the structure optionally includes a chelated metal ion;
when G is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00095
 and r is 0, then if p is 0, then one of R2 and R3 is CO2R2, and the other is H; and
when g is
Figure US20230348405A1-20231102-C00096
 then r is 0.
2.-150. (canceled)
US18/052,804 2009-03-19 2022-11-04 Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof Pending US20230348405A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/052,804 US20230348405A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-11-04 Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (14)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16148409P 2009-03-19 2009-03-19
US16148509P 2009-03-19 2009-03-19
US24806709P 2009-10-02 2009-10-02
US24893409P 2009-10-06 2009-10-06
PCT/US2010/028020 WO2010108125A2 (en) 2009-03-19 2010-03-19 Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US201113257499A 2011-09-19 2011-09-19
US14/243,535 US9776977B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2014-04-02 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US15/618,788 US20180009767A9 (en) 2009-03-19 2017-06-09 Psma targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
US16/704,137 US20200109124A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2019-12-05 Psma targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
US16/820,052 US11021450B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2020-03-16 PSMA targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
US17/331,113 US12065413B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2021-05-26 PSMA targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
US202117474497A 2021-09-14 2021-09-14
US17/718,812 US11661402B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-04-12 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US18/052,804 US20230348405A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-11-04 Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/718,812 Continuation US11661402B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-04-12 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20230348405A1 true US20230348405A1 (en) 2023-11-02

Family

ID=42740262

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/257,499 Active 2031-04-19 US9056841B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2010-03-19 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US14/243,535 Active 2030-03-28 US9776977B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2014-04-02 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US17/718,812 Active 2030-03-19 US11661402B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-04-12 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US18/052,804 Pending US20230348405A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-11-04 Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/257,499 Active 2031-04-19 US9056841B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2010-03-19 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US14/243,535 Active 2030-03-28 US9776977B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2014-04-02 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US17/718,812 Active 2030-03-19 US11661402B2 (en) 2009-03-19 2022-04-12 PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof

Country Status (13)

Country Link
US (4) US9056841B2 (en)
EP (5) EP3964502B1 (en)
CA (3) CA3131469A1 (en)
DK (2) DK3964502T3 (en)
ES (3) ES2988098T3 (en)
FI (1) FI3964502T3 (en)
HR (2) HRP20221195T1 (en)
HU (2) HUE068042T2 (en)
LT (2) LT3964502T (en)
PL (2) PL3964502T3 (en)
PT (2) PT3964502T (en)
SI (1) SI3964502T1 (en)
WO (1) WO2010108125A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (83)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
PT2097111E (en) 2006-11-08 2015-11-03 Molecular Insight Pharm Inc Heterodimers of glutamic acid
JP2010536790A (en) 2007-08-17 2010-12-02 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugate and method of use
WO2009070302A1 (en) * 2007-11-30 2009-06-04 The Johns Hopkins University Prostate specific membrane antigen (psma) targeted nanoparticles for therapy of prostate cancer
EP3964502B1 (en) 2009-03-19 2024-06-12 The Johns Hopkins University Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US20180009767A9 (en) 2009-03-19 2018-01-11 The Johns Hopkins University Psma targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
US9951324B2 (en) 2010-02-25 2018-04-24 Purdue Research Foundation PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugates and methods for using
US10029023B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2018-07-24 The Johns Hopkins University Theranostic imaging agents and methods of use
JP5843338B2 (en) * 2011-08-05 2016-01-13 モレキュラ インサイト ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Radiolabeled prostate-specific membrane antigen inhibitor
WO2013028664A1 (en) 2011-08-22 2013-02-28 Siemens Medical Solutions Usa, Inc. Psma imaging agents
CA2846629C (en) 2011-08-25 2023-08-01 University Of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Methods and compositions comprising a c-terminal bax peptide
US20130116404A1 (en) 2011-11-08 2013-05-09 Case Western Reserve University Targeted non-invasive imaging probes of egfr expressing cells
EP3524277B1 (en) * 2011-11-30 2023-03-08 The Johns Hopkins University Psma-targeting compound and uses thereof
HK1202256A1 (en) * 2012-02-28 2015-09-25 Cornell University Psma as a biomarker for androgen activity in prostate cancer
CN108042811A (en) 2012-11-15 2018-05-18 恩多塞特公司 For treating the conjugate of the disease as caused by PSMA expression cells
FR2998298B1 (en) * 2012-11-21 2020-11-20 Univ Bourgogne SYNTHESIS OF IMIDAZO [1,2-A] PYRAZIN-4-IUM SALTS FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF 1,4,7-TRIAZACYCLONONANE (TACN) AND ITS N- AND / OR C-FUNCTIONALIZED DERIVATIVES
US9447121B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2016-09-20 Molecular Insight Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Triazine based radiopharmaceuticals and radioimaging agents
JP6473138B2 (en) 2013-05-03 2019-02-20 イェール ユニバーシティーＹａｌｅ Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓｉｔｙ Synthetic antibody mimetic compounds (SyAM) targeting cancer, particularly prostate cancer
WO2015057692A1 (en) * 2013-10-14 2015-04-23 The Johns Hopkins University Prostate-specific membrane antigen-targeted photosensitizers for photodynamic therapy
US10406246B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2019-09-10 Deutsches Kresbsforschungszentrum Double-labeled probe for molecular imaging and use thereof
EP3038996B1 (en) * 2013-10-18 2022-06-15 Deutsches Krebsforschungszentrum MARKED INHIBITORS OF PROSTATE-SPECIFIC MEMBRANE ANTIGEN (PSMA), THEIR USE AS IMAGING AGENTS AND PHARMACEUTICAL AGENTS FOR THE TREATMENT OF PROSTATE CANCER
SG10201803618RA (en) * 2013-11-14 2018-06-28 Endocyte Inc Compounds for positron emission tomography
US20170072072A1 (en) * 2014-03-18 2017-03-16 The Methodist Hospital System Ph sensitive fluorescent compounds and methods for tumor detection
JP6749249B2 (en) * 2014-05-06 2020-09-02 ザ ジョンズ ホプキンズ ユニヴァーシティー Metal/Radiometal Labeled PSMA Inhibitors for PSMA-Targeted Imaging and Radiotherapy
US11660357B2 (en) * 2014-05-16 2023-05-30 David A. Scheinberg One-step labeling of antibodies to high specific activity with actinium-225
EP3148583B1 (en) 2014-06-02 2020-04-29 Li-Cor, Inc. Phthalocyanine probes and uses thereof
WO2016010826A1 (en) 2014-07-18 2016-01-21 University Of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Methods and compositions comprising a ct20 peptide
EP3183236B1 (en) 2014-08-24 2022-04-20 Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der Wissenschaften Method for the production of 18f-labeled active esters and their application exemplified by the preparation of a psma-specific pet-tracer
WO2016065145A2 (en) 2014-10-22 2016-04-28 The Johns Hopkins University Psma targeted reversed carbamates and methods of use thereof
US9886665B2 (en) * 2014-12-08 2018-02-06 International Business Machines Corporation Event detection using roles and relationships of entities
US10188759B2 (en) 2015-01-07 2019-01-29 Endocyte, Inc. Conjugates for imaging
CA3022354A1 (en) 2015-04-28 2016-11-03 Sanford Burnham Prebys Medical Discovery Institute At Lake Nona Methods and compositions for theranostic nanoparticles
EP3101012A1 (en) 2015-06-04 2016-12-07 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft New gadolinium chelate compounds for use in magnetic resonance imaging
WO2016197084A1 (en) * 2015-06-05 2016-12-08 Ncm Usa Bronx Llc Method and system for producing gallium-68 radioisotope by solid targeting in a cyclotrion
AU2016302697B2 (en) * 2015-08-06 2020-10-29 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Processes for the preparation of GalNAc acid derivatives
WO2017029399A1 (en) * 2015-08-20 2017-02-23 Universität Zu Köln Pain tracking by pet-imaging (pain-trap)
US10842887B2 (en) 2015-09-09 2020-11-24 On Target Laboratories, LLC PSMA-targeted NIR dyes and their uses
US9808538B2 (en) * 2015-09-09 2017-11-07 On Target Laboratories, LLC PSMA-targeted NIR dyes and their uses
TN2018000089A1 (en) 2015-09-30 2019-07-08 Deutsches Krebsforsch 18f-tagged inhibitors of prostate specific membrane antigen (psma) and their use as imaging agents for prostate cancer
WO2017075171A2 (en) 2015-10-27 2017-05-04 The Johns Hopkins University Pamam dendrimer based cest imaging agents and uses thereof
US10405753B2 (en) 2015-11-10 2019-09-10 Intuitive Surgical Operations, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions of near IR closed chain, sulfo-cyanine dyes
MX378999B (en) 2015-11-16 2025-03-10 Hoffmann La Roche N-ACETYLGALACTOSAMINE CLUSTERING PHOSPHORAMIDITE (GALNAC).
RU2021115958A (en) 2016-03-22 2021-07-12 Дзе Джонс Хопкинс Юниверсити PROSTATIC SPECIFIC MEMBRANE ANTIGEN-TARGET HIGH AFFINITY DRUGS FOR ENDORADIOTHERAPY FOR PROSTATE CANCER
US20170296679A1 (en) 2016-04-18 2017-10-19 Intuitive Surgical Operations, Inc. Compositions of Near IR Closed Chain, Sulfo-Cyanine Dyes and Prostate Specific Membrane Antigen Ligands
CA3040257A1 (en) 2016-07-14 2018-01-18 University Of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Bi-dota complex-loaded dendritic polymer nanoparticles
JP7167021B2 (en) * 2016-11-23 2022-11-08 キャンサー ターゲテッド テクノロジー エルエルシー Albumin-binding PSMA inhibitor
JP7034160B2 (en) 2016-11-28 2022-03-11 バイエル・ファルマ・アクティエンゲゼルシャフト High relaxation gadolinium chelate compound for use in magnetic resonance imaging
ES2913217T3 (en) 2017-01-20 2022-06-01 Regeneron Pharma Rotating surgical table
EP3618867A4 (en) 2017-05-02 2021-01-20 Cornell University METHODS AND REAGENTS FOR AGAINST TUMOR WITH HIGHER EFFICIENCY AND LOWER TOXICITY
WO2018215049A1 (en) 2017-05-23 2018-11-29 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Process for galnac oligonucleotide conjugates
CN111032632B (en) 2017-05-30 2024-04-12 约翰霍普金斯大学 High affinity agents for prostate specific membrane antigen targeting for intracavity radiation therapy of prostate cancer
AU2018280856B2 (en) 2017-06-09 2024-10-10 Avencell Europe Gmbh Targeting modules for universal chimeric antigen receptor expressing immune cells and use in the treatment of cancer infections and autoimmune disorders
US11814365B2 (en) 2017-06-15 2023-11-14 The Johns Hopkins University PSMA targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
WO2019036249A1 (en) 2017-08-18 2019-02-21 Li-Cor, Inc. Sonodynamic therapy
WO2019083990A2 (en) 2017-10-23 2019-05-02 The Johns Hopkins University IMAGING AND RADIOTHERAPEUTICS AGENTS TARGETING FIBROBLAST-ACTIVATION PROTEIN-α (FAP-α)
EP3710068A1 (en) 2017-11-13 2020-09-23 Deutsches Krebsforschungszentrum A double-labeled probe for molecular imaging and use thereof
AU2018373675B2 (en) * 2017-11-21 2022-06-16 Deutsches Krebsforschungszentrum A double-labeled probe for molecular imaging and use thereof
KR20250126870A (en) 2018-02-06 2025-08-25 더 존스 홉킨스 유니버시티 Psma targeted radiohalogenated urea-polyaminocarboxylates for cancer radiotherapy
WO2019183633A1 (en) 2018-03-23 2019-09-26 Case Western Reserve Univeristy Psma targeted conjugate compounds and uses thereof
WO2019204432A2 (en) * 2018-04-17 2019-10-24 Cornell University Fluorine-18 labeled compositions and their use in imaging of biological tissue
WO2019204335A1 (en) 2018-04-17 2019-10-24 Endocyte, Inc. Methods of treating cancer
WO2020028323A1 (en) * 2018-07-30 2020-02-06 The Johns Hopkins Universtiy Competitive prostate-specific membrane antigen (psma) binding agents for the reduction of non-target organ uptake of radiolabeled psma inhibitors for psma positive tumor imaging and radiopharmaceutical therapy
EP3636635A1 (en) 2018-10-11 2020-04-15 Academisch Ziekenhuis Leiden h.o.d.n. LUMC Imaging agents
JP7520007B2 (en) 2018-11-23 2024-07-22 バイエル アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Contrast agent formulations and methods for their preparation
MY208749A (en) 2019-01-30 2025-05-27 Coherent Biopharma Suzhou Ltd Biligand drug conjugates and uses thereof
CN120097930A (en) 2019-05-20 2025-06-06 因多塞特股份有限公司 Method for preparing PSMA conjugates
CN113117100B (en) * 2019-12-31 2024-03-01 广东精观生物医药科技有限公司 Fluorescent molecular probe for targeting PSMA and preparation method and application thereof
EP4185336A1 (en) * 2020-07-23 2023-05-31 Technische Universität München Silicon-containing ligand compounds
WO2022032100A2 (en) * 2020-08-07 2022-02-10 The Johns Hopkins University Imaging and targeting programmed death ligand-1 (pd-li) expression
WO2022101352A1 (en) 2020-11-12 2022-05-19 Abx Advanced Biochemical Compounds Gmbh Ligands of prostate specific membrane antigen (psma) containing heteroaromatic linker building blocks
KR20230170703A (en) 2021-04-07 2023-12-19 센츄리 쎄라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 Compositions and methods for generating gamma-delta T cells from induced pluripotent stem cells
CA3214661A1 (en) 2021-04-07 2022-10-13 Century Therapeutics, Inc. Combined artificial cell death/reporter system polypeptide for chimeric antigen receptor cell and uses thereof
CA3214473A1 (en) 2021-04-07 2022-10-13 Century Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for generating alpha-beta t cells from induced pluripotent stem cells
EP4429654A4 (en) 2021-11-09 2025-07-09 Univ Case Western Reserve CONJUGATE COMPOUNDS DIRECTED TO PSMA AND USES THEREOF
TW202404643A (en) 2022-04-20 2024-02-01 大陸商同宜醫藥（蘇州）有限公司 Compound and use thereof
AU2023284442A1 (en) 2022-06-08 2024-12-05 Century Therapeutics, Inc. Genetically engineered cells expressing cd16 variants and nkg2d and uses thereof
TW202426433A (en) 2022-09-23 2024-07-01 瑞士商紐利迪姆股份公司 Fibroblast activation protein (fap) inhibitors, fap conjugates, and diagnostic and therapeutic uses thereof
CN120282804A (en) 2022-09-23 2025-07-08 核素迪姆股份公司 High purity copper radiopharmaceutical compositions and diagnostic and therapeutic uses thereof
JPWO2024143314A1 (en) * 2022-12-27 2024-07-04
AU2024208501A1 (en) 2023-01-10 2025-07-24 Sun Pharma Advanced Research Company Limited Ligand-drug conjugates
JP2025534939A (en) 2023-07-31 2025-10-22 キュリウム ユーエス エルエルシー [177LU]Lutetium-PSMA I&T Compositions and Dosimetry, Kits, Methods of Making Same, and Methods of Using Same
US12440585B2 (en) * 2023-09-12 2025-10-14 Curadel Surgical Innovations, Inc. Zwitterionic metal chelators
WO2025119908A1 (en) 2023-12-06 2025-06-12 Bracco Imaging Spa Psma-targeting fluorescent probes
WO2025163029A1 (en) 2024-01-31 2025-08-07 Bracco Imaging Spa Psma-targeting bimodal and heterobivalent fluorescent agents

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SE9704186D0 (en) 1997-11-14 1997-11-14 Astra Ab New composition of matter
US6159657A (en) 1999-08-31 2000-12-12 Eastman Kodak Company Thermal imaging composition and member containing sulfonated ir dye and methods of imaging and printing
WO2002024235A2 (en) 2000-05-12 2002-03-28 University Hospital Prochelators of radiometal labeled molecules
US6663847B1 (en) 2000-10-13 2003-12-16 Mallinckrodt Inc. Dynamic organ function monitoring agents
WO2002041925A1 (en) 2000-11-24 2002-05-30 Breath Limited Sterilisation of pharmaceuticals
DK1472541T3 (en) * 2002-01-10 2010-01-25 Univ Johns Hopkins Imaging agents and methods for imaging NAALADase and PSMA
FR2903952B1 (en) 2006-07-21 2009-06-12 Renault Sas DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MONITORING CONTROL OF DIRECT REAR WHEEL BRAKE.
WO2008109832A2 (en) 2007-03-08 2008-09-12 Visen Medical, Inc. Viable near-infrared fluorochrome labeled cells and methods of making and using same
WO2009002529A2 (en) * 2007-06-26 2008-12-31 The Johns Hopkins University Labeled inhibitors of prostate specific membrane antigen (psma), biological evaluation, and use as imaging agents
JP2010536790A (en) * 2007-08-17 2010-12-02 パーデュー・リサーチ・ファウンデーション PSMA binding ligand-linker conjugate and method of use
WO2009070302A1 (en) * 2007-11-30 2009-06-04 The Johns Hopkins University Prostate specific membrane antigen (psma) targeted nanoparticles for therapy of prostate cancer
JP2009169768A (en) 2008-01-17 2009-07-30 Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Information processor and program
EP2706057B1 (en) * 2008-12-05 2016-04-20 Molecular Insight Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bis(imidazolyl)compounds and radionuclide complexes
EP3964502B1 (en) * 2009-03-19 2024-06-12 The Johns Hopkins University Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US20180009767A9 (en) 2009-03-19 2018-01-11 The Johns Hopkins University Psma targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
EP3524277B1 (en) * 2011-11-30 2023-03-08 The Johns Hopkins University Psma-targeting compound and uses thereof
EP3601724B1 (en) 2017-03-28 2024-10-23 Baker Hughes Holdings LLC Wireline-deployed esp with self-supporting cable

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US9056841B2 (en) 2015-06-16
HUE068042T2 (en) 2024-12-28
CA3035532C (en) 2021-10-26
EP3964498A1 (en) 2022-03-09
LT3222617T (en) 2022-10-25
CA3035532A1 (en) 2010-09-23
EP3964498B1 (en) 2024-06-19
PL3964502T3 (en) 2024-10-28
EP3964502B1 (en) 2024-06-12
LT3964502T (en) 2024-08-26
PT3964502T (en) 2024-07-22
CA3131469A1 (en) 2010-09-23
US20150104387A1 (en) 2015-04-16
ES2988098T3 (en) 2024-11-19
EP3222617B1 (en) 2022-07-06
EP2408755A2 (en) 2012-01-25
EP4420730A3 (en) 2024-11-13
SI3964502T1 (en) 2024-09-30
EP2408755A4 (en) 2012-09-12
WO2010108125A2 (en) 2010-09-23
EP4420730A2 (en) 2024-08-28
US20220259161A1 (en) 2022-08-18
DK3964502T3 (en) 2024-07-22
CA2755965A1 (en) 2010-09-23
EP2408755B1 (en) 2017-05-03
PL3222617T3 (en) 2023-01-02
WO2010108125A3 (en) 2011-03-24
HRP20221195T1 (en) 2022-12-09
ES2636618T3 (en) 2017-10-06
US11661402B2 (en) 2023-05-30
EP3222617A1 (en) 2017-09-27
PT3222617T (en) 2022-09-30
DK3222617T3 (en) 2022-10-03
US20120009121A1 (en) 2012-01-12
HRP20240952T1 (en) 2024-10-11
ES2928480T3 (en) 2022-11-18
CA2755965C (en) 2019-04-16
FI3964502T3 (en) 2024-07-29
EP3964502A1 (en) 2022-03-09
US9776977B2 (en) 2017-10-03
HUE059796T2 (en) 2022-12-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11661402B2 (en) PSMA-targeting compounds and uses thereof
US12065413B2 (en) PSMA targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
US11911488B2 (en) Scaffolds and multifunctional intermediates for imaging PSMA and cancer therapy
US10039845B2 (en) Labeled inhibitors of prostate specific membrane antigen (PSMA) biological evaluation, and use of imaging agents
US20240150323A1 (en) Psma targeted fluorescent agents for image guided surgery
AU2015203742B2 (en) Labeled inhibitors of prostate specific membrane antigen (psma), biological evaluation, and use as imaging agents
Class et al. Patent application title: PSMA TARGETED FLUORESCENT AGENTS FOR IMAGE GUIDED SURGERY
HK40071479B (en) Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof
HK40071479A (en) Psma-targeting compounds and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSTY, MARYLAND

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:POMPER, MARTIN G;MEASE, RONNIE C;RAY, SANGEETA;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:063037/0018

Effective date: 20100513

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION